Home
        Oce ColorWave 600 User Guide Manual
         Contents
1.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          I  fe      anime 3N1084                apm  O 0   pron 3N1086      3N1091                                                                         The advised settings    You can also find an overview of the advised settings on the Quality Reference Chart  This chart gives an overview of the different types of print files and the print settings and  color management settings that give the best output result for these print files    The Quality Reference Chart is available as a demo print on the printer operator panel    see How to print the Quality Reference Chart    on page 355      i  Note     For optimal print quality please verify that the name of the loaded media corresponds  with the media name on the printer operator panel     Setting Advised value Advised rendering intent  value       Print Setting       Oc   Print Assistant             Color feel    not applicable not applicable    358 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    2D CAD color       2D CAD color          i a  oa  j i r 3N1165  amg J    __smtoot      na       3N1116 amioga                    aie 3N1086  3N1091    eee                            The advised settings    You can also find an overview of the advised settings on
2.                eseeeee 130   Change the display language of the printer                 ceeeeeeeee 130   Configure the network settings on the printer operator panel 132   Configure print  JO DS esicstesicieceewccdd ed aan dis eaaa aaa aaa aaa A Aaaa diaaa 136   Relevant settings in the Oc   Express WebTools    136   Set the default print job SettiNGS           cccccccccceeceesseseesesesessneees 136   Set the Color management SettiNGS          2   c ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 140  Chapter 5   Use the printing SYSteM            cccccceeeeeeessseesseenceneeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseennessssssnseaaaes 143   Work with the Oc   ColorWave 600 printel         cccccsscccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 144   Set UP th   Printe ssena aidan annann a eaaa da habena iaaii 144   The  Media Crawe r         csscccccccccecceceeeeeeseeeeesseesessessseeanseeeneeeeeees 144   REMOVE a media POll         ccsceeesessscececeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeseessssessseenesseneees 146   Unpack the media roll          cessccsssccecceceeeceeeeeeeeeesesesssessssenesseneees 148   Load a Media rOll           ccccsesssssssesnceeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceesseeesssseesssnnaaes 150   Define the media type and the Core SiZ             2     ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 156   The output CELIVELY        cccccccccccecceeeeceeeesseessessssssnecsesauseeeeeeeeeeess 158   Make a new media profile available on the printer operator pan    Gis EEEE EE ETE EE A AAE AEE A EE A  161   Load or replace a toner Cartridge             eeeececeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaees 162   Repl
3.            Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 317    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the    Print Setting          Setting Description   Economy  This setting is appropriate for fast printing of 2D CAD drawings   The print speed is around half a minute per Ao   Typical example of a file that can be printed with the  Econo     my  Print Setting           voy  sans J      mon    ar Ke                318 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Set the  Print Setting       Setting Description       Production      You can use the    Production Plus    setting in the  Oc   Express  WebTools    to define how the Oc   ColorWave 600 must interpret  the  Production   Print Setting       m Select Production    for regular prints     The print speed is around one minute per Ao    This setting is appropriate for printing high quality 2D CAD  drawings and low coverage area prints  GIS     This setting is not appropriate for printing high coverage area  prints  3D CAD     Select    Production Plus    if prints that are printed with the  Pro   duction    print setting show print artefacts that you want to re   duce    This setting is appropriate for printing low coverage area prints   GIS  and  in most cases  for high coverage area prints  3D CAD   Posters  Photos      Typical example of a file that can be printed with the  Produc   tion Print Setting           Chapter 8   Print quality and Print pr
4.            Use the  Numeric keys    to enter the first value of  your IP address                Confirm your entries with the  Confirmation key     Repeat this procedure for the other numeric fields           until you have entered the complete IP address   Use the  Upper right softkey    to go to the next  step         Enter your subnet mask    Use the    Scroll wheel    to select the first numeric  field  Confirm your selection with the  Confirma   tion key    above the  Scroll wheel       Use the  Numeric keys    to enter the first value of  your subnet mask    Confirm your entries with the    Confirmation key     Repeat this procedure for the other numeric fields  until you have entered the complete subnet mask   Use the  Upper right softkey    to go to the next  step         Enter your default gateway   Use the    Scroll wheel    to select the first numeric  field  Confirm your selection with the  Confirma         tion key    above the    Scroll wheel       Use the  Numeric keys    to enter the first value of  your default gateway    Confirm your entries with the  Confirmation key            Repeat this procedure for the other numeric fields  until you have entered the complete default gate   way    Use the  Upper right softkey    to go to the next  step                 62 Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Configure the network settings manually         Action    Enter your DNS address    Use 
5.        Appendix A   Specifications of the Oc   ColorWave 600 401    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Specifications    Oc   PowerM controller   Oc   PowerM Plus controller         Color management    Language sensing    Supported on the controller  Oc   Express   WebTools      Color feel      m    Oc   CAD colors      m    Oc   enhanced colors    m Simulated printer  simulation of Oc   and non   Oc   printers    m    None  managed by application        Enhanced colors  RGB input data     m  sRGB     m    Adobe RGB     Enhanced colors  CMYK input data     a    Euroscale coated           Euroscale uncoated         US web coated  SWOP    m    US web uncoated       Automatic Language Sensing  ALS        Standard file formats    m Vector  HP GL  HP GL 2  CalComp  a Raster  HP RTL  TIFF 6 0  CALS I  NIRS   C4  JPG             Cut length m Standard cut  m Synchro cut    Custom cut  Optional For Oc   ColorWave 600 the following licenses are    available    m Oc   ColorWave 600 license      Adobe   PostScript 3   PDF printing   m Oc   Account Logic        402 Appendix A   Specifications of the Oc   ColorWave 600    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Specifications Oc   ColorWave 600 printer       Specifications Oc   ColorWave 600 printer    Technology  Oc   CrystalPoint    technology   Oc   own developed    Imaging devices  and  Oc   TonerPearls          Instant dry print technology        riage    and Py     Imaging de  m  vices   CMYK   m   a       Imaging
6.        toe       i 5 awww wore 2  Ji wetter an  as ki  Dt ahotea BOAO a         irs  7 om     Nee Megerte  L  e  al            As soon as a scan job is sent to the printer you can follow the progress of the job in the  system     m The status of the active jobs in the    Active jobs  section   m The list of the completed jobs in the    History    section  up to 50      When available  the system displays also additional information on the status of a job   see Job Status    on page 246      The    Active jobs    section     The    Active jobs  section displays for each active job     m The job  Name     244 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The    Active jobs  section and the    History    section       The  Status    The  Rank  in the printer queue   The  Time  when the job was submitted to the printer  Additional Information    if available     From this section  you can       Configure the    Job properties     see    View the settings    on page 249   m Reprint a job  see    Reprint a job    on page 248    m Cancel a job  see    Cancel a job after submission    on page 2 48      Once the job is printed or canceled  or blocked in  Error  status   it moves from the  Active  jobs    to the  History  section     The    History    section     Each job submitted during a session appears in the  History  section when it has reached  a final status  You can see     m The status of the job     Printed      Error  or  cancel
7.      All primary and secondary colors are clean  because  they are printed with pure inks  This is clearly  visible if you look at the color yellow that is  printed with yellow ink only    An increase in coverage results in  almost  the same  increase in ink    The blue color is not purplish but nice blue   This mode is preferred for CAD drawings created  with applications like AutoCAD or ArcView   Photos printed in this mode will look dull and  grayish           Oc   enhanced colors  Use this setting to get a print with photo realistic   colors    Advised for photos or graphic art presentations    If you select  Oc   enhanced colors  you can also   adjust the advanced Color Management settings    m    Enhanced colors  RGB input data      m    Enhanced colors  CMYK input data     only for  TIFF and JPEG files or for PostScript and PDF  files     m    Enhanced colors  rendering intent             Simulated Oc   TCS400 CAD   Use this setting to get a print with colors similar          colors    to the Oc   TCS400 printer       Simulated non Oc   printer  Use this setting to get a print with colors similar   vivid colors      to a non Oc   printer that prints vivid colors     Simulated non Oc   printer  Use this setting to get a print with colors similar   match screen colors    to a non Oc   printer that prints match screen  colors              336 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    What is Color feel               
8.      F                72 Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Unpack a media roll    Illustration    Remove the plug from the media  roll     Carefully remove the media roll  from the box        4 Remove the other plug and  plastic around the media roll     Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started 73    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load a media roll       Load a media roll    How to load a media roll    A    A    A    74    Attention   Do not use dented media rolls to prevent damage to the imaging devices     Attention   Do not open the media drawer during the print process  When the last print is delivered   wait 10 seconds before you open the media drawer     Attention   Do not open more than one media drawer at the same time to prevent overbalance of  the printer     Attention    It is very important to select the media type with the correct media code  for example  LFMogo   You can find the media code of the new media roll on the sticker on media  box  The media code represents a specific media profile that the Oc   ColorWave 600  uses to optimize the printed output for the corresponding media type  If the correct media  code is not available on your printer operator panel  you must first make a new media  profile available on the printer operator panel   see Make a new media profile available  on the printer operator panel    on page 161     Attention    Wh
9.      Top cover        Top right cover     Delivery tray for the printed output     Note   It is possible to install an optional   Receiving rack  basket   or a folder     Cover on top of the printer  used for error re   covery  This cover gives access to the imaging  section     see    The    Imaging section    on page 30        16       Printer operator panel          The printer operator panel helps the operator   to do the following    m set up the printer   m define media types and sizes  used on the  Oc   ColorWave 600 printer       monitor the media and toner stock  control the Oc   ColorWave 600 printer  and the workflow   perform maintenance tasks   solve problems     see    The hardware of the Printer operator panel     on page 31     see    The main screens on the printer operator  panel    on page 34        17       Front right cover        18  19        Upper right cover    On   Off switch       Used to switch on off the printer        20     Lower right cover        21          Foot             Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Chapter 2   Get to know the printing system 25    The printer hardware components  back     The printer hardware components  back           Illustration  9  10  8 11  7 12  6  5  j 13  3  2       Component   function table    Nr Component Description   Function     Left cover of the media  drawer         Back cover of the media  drawer        Connection panel    The connection panel of   m the  Oc   PowerM controller      stand
10.     Color feel        Description       Simulated non Oc   printer  no   Use this setting to get a print with colors similar  color correction  to a non Oc   printer that prints without color  correction             None  managed by application      Use this setting if your color management is com       pletely done by the application that generated the   print file    If the color management is not handled correctly   by the application  possible problems are    m  blue will be purplish  like in most other inkjet  printers     m  raster file information  like photos  will look    dull and dark              The output quality of a simulated non Oc   printer setting depends on the selected input  profile for simulated printers  Make sure you use the correct input profile for simulated  printers     Oc   ColorWave 600 path  Support   Input profiles     Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 337    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Definition of rendering intents       What are Rendering intents     Definition of rendering intents    Normally the color space of a print file is larger than the Oc   ColorWave 600 color space   In other words  the input color space is larger than the output color space  Consequently  some of the defined input colors will be outside the Oc   ColorWave 600 color space   These  out of gamut colors  are called a gamut mismatch    When a gamut mismatch occurs  the rendering intent setting decides what qualities of  the image it sho
11.     Current date and time          Current date and time       Time format        i  Note   Every time you change the  Measurement unit     the controller recalculates the values  from millimeter to inches and vice versa  If you reverse to the original value of this setting  a slight calculation difference can occur due to rounding differences     How to define the regional settings    1  Select  Preferences     System properties       2  Click  Edit  in the  Regional settings    bar or click the value of the setting you want to  edit  for example  First language       3  Modify the settings  You can choose between   m settings that are commonly used in the USA  m or settings that are commonly used in the rest of the world     4  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or  Cancel  to reject your entries     Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started 83    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Print the Customer Analysis Tool  CAT  demo print       Print the Customer Analysis Tool  CAT  demo print    When to do    When you have installed the printer and prepared the printer for use  you can print the  Customer Analysis Tool demo print  You can use this demo print to check if the Oc    ColorWave 600 works correctly     How to print the Customer Analysis Tool  CAT  demo print  Action Illustration    From the  Home  screen on the printer operator panel  select the  System  tab     Select the  Maintenance     tab with the upper left softkey     Use the    S
12.     Cut the media    Cut the media    Introduction    When a media jam occurs  one of the steps to solve the problem is to cut the jammed  media  The printer operator panel displays the following message     Push beck the metal plete thet    Action Illustration    Use your right hand to push   down the metal plate that guides  the media  Use your left hand to  cut the media from left to right  with the knife behind the front    cover     Again  push down the metal    plate that guides the media to  place the knife back into the    original position        Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system 309    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Cut the media       310 Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Chapter 8  Print quality and Print  productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Main settings that influence the print quality    Main settings that influence the print quality    Overview table print quality settings    To increase the print quality of your system  you can define the following default settings  to configure the system to get optimal results     Settings in settings group    Preferences       System properties         Printer properties        Oc   Print Assistant Behavior  setting  see Set the  Oc   Print Assistant Behavior     on  page 323     Settings in settings group    Preferences      Print job defaults       Basic        Print 
13.     Print Setting     Oc   Print Assistant          364 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Point of sales graphics    Setting Advised value Advised rendering intent  value       Color feel       Oc   enhanced colors     Relative colorimetric          or   Oc   CAD colours  not applicable    Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 365    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Consumer graphics       Consumer graphics       The advised settings    You can also find an overview of the advised settings on the Quality Reference Chart  This chart gives an overview of the different types of print files and the print settings and  color management settings that give the best output result for these print files    The Quality Reference Chart is available as a demo print on the printer operator panel    see    How to print the Quality Reference Chart    on page 355      i  Note     For optimal print quality please verify that the name of the loaded media corresponds  with the media name on the printer operator panel     Setting Advised value Advised rendering intent  VELU     Print Setting     Oc   Print Assistant          366 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Consumer graphics    Setting   Advised value Advised rendering intent  value      Color feel       Oc   enhanced colors       Perceptual  photo    for  photos           Relative colorimetr
14.     back         External output     back     Top delivery tray           Top delivery tray         Top delivery tray        410 Appendix A   Specifications of the Oc   ColorWave 600    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Preferred Oc   media types and sizes       Note   Visit Oc   on the internet at http   mediaguide oce com for the latest information     Note   To make sure that your print quality is optimal you can download the OMP file  Oc    Media Profiles file  with the right media code from the Oc   website for all media types     Media types   USA    The following preferred media types are available for the Oc   ColorWave 600 in the  USA     Preferred media types   USA    Description Name on the Output delivery  Printer operator  panel    45111 Oc   Bond 45111 Oc   Bond    Top delivery tray   2olb  45111R   Oc   Recycled 45111R Recycled    Top delivery tray   Bond Bond 20  45800 Oc   Premium 45800 Oc   Prem    Top delivery tray   Bond Bond 24    6024 Generic Bond 24lb   6024 Oc   Prem  Top delivery tray   Bond 24lb       6028 Oc   Premium 28lb   6028 Oc   Prem  Top delivery tray   Bond Bond 281b   6032 Oc   Premium 32lb   6032 Oc   Prem    External output  Bond Bond 32Ib  back     6007 Oc   Premium 7 5 6007 Oc   Prem  Top delivery tray   Tyvek 7 5 mil mil Tyvek 7 5 mil   44543 Opaque Film 4mil   4 mil   44543 Opaque    External output   Film 4 mil  back     44632 Polyester Film 3 5   3 5 44632 Polyester  Top delivery tray    mil mil Film 3 5 mil    450018 Oc
15.     see Set the Print Setting       on page 317       Production Plus  setting  see    Set the    Production Plus    setting    on page 321    Economy monochrome enhanced setting  see Set the    Economy monochrome enhanced   setting    on page 322        Settings in settings group    Preferences      Print job defaults       Postscript PDF  rasterization settings        PDF processing optimization    setting  see Set the PDF processing optimization       on  page 324        PDF wipeout correction    setting  see Set the  PDF wipeout correction    on page 325     Settings in settings group    Preferences       Print job defaults      Layout          Rotation    mode  see Set the    Rotation    mode    on page 330      Alignment    mode  see Set the    Alignment    mode    on page 331     Settings in settings group    Configuration       Printer setup         Printer languages          Long plot mode  setting  see Set the    Long plot mode    on page 326     The overview only refers to settings that you can influence in the Oc   Express WebTools        The print productivity depends on the following aspects   a The size and complexity of the input file     314 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Main settings that influence the print productivity       m The print job submission application   m The settings that must be set during the print job creation and submission  Orientation   Rotation  Resizing  Print quality 
16.    Installation   Hardcopy manual  only US English   On CD ROM    Available as an online document or as a  PDF file in multiple languages      On www oce com  Available as an online document or as a  PDF file in multiple languages            i  Note     Visit Oc   on the internet at www oce com for the latest information     14 Chapter 1   Introduction    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Available documentation       Available documentation Oc   Express WebTools    Documentation WET Fleyii ays    User manual   Operating information     On www oce com  Available as a PDF file in multiple lan   guages   On CD ROM  Available as an online document and as a  PDF file in multiple languages     On line Help Embedded in the application  Available in multiple languages        Oc   TDS TCS connectivity manual On CD ROM  Available as a PDF file in English only        fa Note   Visit Oc   on the internet at www oce com for the latest information     Available documentation Oc   Windows    Printer Driver    Documentation Availability  User manual   On www oce com  Available as a PDF file in multiple lan     guages   m On Driver Pack CD ROM    Available as a PDF file in multiple lan   guages     On line Help m Embedded in the application  Available in multiple languages      i  Note   Visit Oc   on the internet at www oce com for the latest information        Chapter 1   Introduction 15    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Available documentation       Available do
17.    Translucent 18lb   450018 Translu     Top delivery tray   cent 18lb             Appendix A   Specifications of the Oc   ColorWave 600 411    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Preferred Oc   media types and sizes    Name on the Output delivery  Printer operator  panel    459000 Oc   Vellum 20lb 459000 Oc   Vel       External output  lum 2o0lb  back      459020 Oc   Vellum 459020 Oc   Vel     Top delivery tray   lum 2o0lb          Note   Li  To make sure that your print quality is optimal you can download the OMP file  Oc    Media Profiles file  with the right media code from the Oc   website for all media types     Media sizes    Maximum   Minimum    Media width 42 inch 297 millimeters  11 inch       412 Appendix A   Specifications of the Oc   ColorWave 600    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Support for non Oc   media types and sizes       Support for non Oc   media types and sizes    Introduction    Oc   machines and media are matched for the best quality and performance  However   Oc   provides a limited number of Media profiles for non Oc   media types     Attention    A Do not store the paper in rooms where temperature and humidity are high  Avoid dust  and direct sunlight  Wrap unused paper in the plastic to prevent it from absorbing  moisture     Media types  The following media profiles are available for non Oc   media types   Media types   Papers    Description g m     mil   Name on the Printer oper    Output delivery  or mu ator panel    P
18.    away the empty packag   ing of the new toner  cartridge  This packag   ing is used as mainte   nance tray     Remove the empty toner car   tridge        Chapter 5   Use the printing system 163    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load or replace a toner cartridge    Illustration    Place the new toner cartridge      i  Note    You must place the ton   er cartridge in the cor   rect color position  The  toner cartridges have  fixed positions     When the new toner cartridge is  placed correctly  the following  message is displayed on the  printer operator panel     Replace the maintenance tray   Use the packaging of the new  toner cartridge        Baplace the mertenacce toy Use  Me Pach Ogi Of the new toner  crrege    Prope Meot to start    Follow the instructions in the  wizard   see    Replace the mainte   nance tray    on page 67              164 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Replace the maintenance tray    Replace the maintenance tray    Illustration    Nr Component Description   Function  7  Maintenance tray  drawer       How to replace the maintenance tray       Action Illustration    The printer operator panel dis   plays a request when you must  replace the maintenance tray  ma peckayeye bene toner    cortrage  Prope Meret to start       Chapter 5   Use the printing system 165    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Replace the maintenance tray    Illustration    Follow the instructions i
19.    settings       Note    Li  If you select a media not loaded on the printer  or if the roll is empty  and submit the  job  the job status will turn into  Waiting      Media not currently loaded on the printer     and the job will be held until you load the selected media     Note    Li   Warning  in case of folding  if the media you select does not support folding  an error  message is displayed  You must select a foldable media  type and size  or disable the  folding option to be able to print the job      Layout     Define if the image is scaled or not  Select                  1 1 Scale    to keep the original image size      Custom scale    to define a custom scale value  from 1  to 1000      Reduce to fit  for an  Automatic scale down when image is larger than  media      Scale to fit    for an    Automatic scale to the media size        Finishing       If a folder is declared in the print system  you can check the  Fold  option     Note    Li  When the selected media and print settings do not allow the folded output to be delivered  with the legend on top of the folded packet  a warning message is displayed   The legend  will not be on top of the folded packet          The  Delivery destination    depends on the printer capabilities and on the  Fold    option   To take delivery of an unfolded printout  select the  Top Delivery Tray  TDT   or the   External output    at the back of the printer    When folding is enabled and selected  the printout is automatically sent t
20.    tem for use and get start   ed    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Introduction       Introduction    This chapter contains all the information you need to prepare your Oc   ColorWave 600  for use     You can learn more about the following    How to move the printer    How to connect the power supply cable and the network cable    How to run the installation procedure    How to  re load the toner cartridges    How to  re place the maintenance tray    How to  re load a media roll    How to complete the printer configuration in the Oc   Express WebTools   How to configure the regional settings of the Oc   ColorWave 600    How to print the Customer Acceptance Test     44 Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    How to move the Oc   ColorWave 600    How to move the Oc   ColorWave 600    Introduction       Attention   A If connected you must first switch off and disconnect the Oc   ColorWave 600   see  Switch on or switch off the printer    on page 172        Attention   A Close the media drawers     Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started 45    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    How to move the Oc   ColorWave 600    Note   li  Be aware of the printer working area   see    Printer working area  Footprint  on page 23     Illustration    Use both hands to pull at the   Lower left cover     Remove the   Lower left cover        Pull at the Foot cover  Remove  the 
21.    the strips  if any additional leading or trailing strip  in light gray    the direction of the paper feed  with the arrow    the cut location    the system white space if any    Below the preview  the system displays the following file properties     the scale factor  in percentage of the original size   the size of the printed image  the media size on which it will be printed    the number of pages of the file    Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 261    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Basic    settings       Set the Basic and Advanced settings     Basic    settings    Introduction    In this tab  you can view the general main settings of a document     Illustration       tein J eee    3    wee ada PELTI 5   0d 10 te ape ee  p   Det me a    ww a J    Sate tector   Pretec me mes    Mesa ie BO At pod  794 mm   Nebr page 1   bagpodixctum Booed on CAD standart    ra  Q pma  pt  Q mmr pe  Q aoet re  G reaa  ps          Media     You can manually select in the lists the    Media type  and the  Media size    to be used     The lists display all the media  type and size  enabled on the printer   A roll status icon indicates if a specific media type on the printer is available  empty or    loaded     When you select a  Roll  in the  Media size     the media is cut to the size of the image   To cut to a standard sheet size  select a    Sheet size        262 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Basic 
22.   Get to know the printing system 35    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The main screens on the printer operator panel    Screen Function    The  Maintenance  screen allows you to perform mainte   nance tasks and troubleshooting tasks   Tasks  performed by    Any user     but most likely by the  Key  operator     to solve problems with the printer   m  Calibration      Calibrate the printer     m   Clear system    Remove all jobs from system   a  Demo print        Print a demo image        Demoprint Economy Mode     Demoprint Presentation Mode             Demoprint Production Mode     Quality Reference Chart       Customer Analysis Tool     m Usage counters  counters   TAC readings      Note   The  TAC  is a click that is a function of print volume     square meter  and of toner coverage  grams  square  meter      The  Configuration  screen allows you to configure the  printer    Tasks  performed by the  System administrator          Configure the system  install  network configuration    m Set the preferred language      Monitor the software version                 36 Chapter 2   Get to know the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The finishing options       Finishing  The finishing options    Introduction    The Oc   ColorWave 600 is delivered with a  Top delivery tray    to collect your printed  output     The  Top delivery tray    can collect 50   100 plain paper prints with a maximum length  of 48   1200mm      Note   Li  The me
23.   Log on as System administrator or Power user in the Oc   Express WebTools     For example  click on the value of the  Enable DHCP    setting to display a window where  you can change the value      i  Note     This window also contains a short explanation of the setting     4  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or  Cancel  to reject your entries     Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 127    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the  Network duplex mode          Set the    Network duplex mode     Introduction    Use the Oc   Express WebTools to set Network duplex mode  for your network adapter   The list of values you can select depends on the type of network card     Before you begin    This setting is editable for the System administrator or Power user     How to set the    Network duplex mode       1  Click  Configuration       Connectivity       2  Click    Edit    in the  Network adapter    bar or click the value of the  Network duplex mode   setting    3  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or    Cancel    to reject your entries     128 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the  Network speed          Set the  Network speed     Introduction    Use the Oc   Express WebTools to set    Network speed    for your network adapter   The list of values you can select depends on the type of network card     Before you begin    This setting is editable for the System administrator or the Power user     At
24.   O Yes  ONo    Is the format of this manual convenient in size  readability and arrangement  page layout   chapter order  etc      O Yes   ONo    Could you find the information you were looking for   O Always   O Most of the times   O Sometimes    O Not at all    What did you use to find the required information   O Table of contents  O Index    Are you satisfied with this manual   O Yes  O No    Thank you for evaluating this manual   Ifyou have other comments or concerns  please explain or suggest improvements overleaf  or on a separate sheet     Comments     418 Appendix B   Reader s comment sheet    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Reader s comment sheet       This reader s comment sheet is completed by    If you prefer to remain unknown  please do fill in your occupation     Name    Occupation    Company    Phone    Address    City    Country    Please return this sheet to     Oc   Technologies B V    For the attention of ITC User Documentation   P O  Box 101    5900 MA Venlo   The Netherlands    Send your comments by E mail to  itc userdoc oce com    For the addresses of local Oc   organisations see  http   www oce com    Appendix B   Reader s comment sheet 419    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Reader s comment sheet       420 Appendix B   Reader s comment sheet    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Appendix C  Addresses of local Oc    organizations    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Addresses of local Oc   organisati
25.   Print job defaults      You can find a short explanation of the most important print job defaults below   When you define print job settings in the printer drivers or the job submission tools   these values always overrule the default values defined in the Oc   Express WebTools     Illustration    Express WebTools       Overview of the  Print job defaults       Basic     Editable for Key operator and Power user     136 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the default print job settings          Preferences       Print job defaults    Basic            Setting Description     Number of sets  Enter the default value for the number of times you want  your jobs to be printed           Collate    m Select  On  sort by set   if your printed output must be  sorted by set  123   123    Select  Off  sort by page     if your printed output must  be sorted by page  11   22   33       Delivery destination    Select  Top delivery tray    if your printed output must  default be delivered in the Top delivery tray   Select    External output  back   if your printed output  must default be delivered at the back of the printer  Se   lect this option if you want to use the optional  Receiv   ing rack  basket   or a folder     Note   If you use 2 inch core media  the output is always  delivered at the back of the printer      see Set the    Color mode    on page 316    see Set the  Print Setting       on page 317        Production Plus  
26.   Standardization    Color feel    Rendering intent  ta    RGB m  sRGB     Oc   CAD colours     m  AdobeRGB        Euroscale    Oc   enhanced colors     Perceptual  pho   coated  to        Euroscale un   Saturation  business  coated  graphics       a  US Web coat     Absolute colorimet   ed  SWOP   ric      a    US Web un     Relative colorimet   coated ric        Simulated Oc   TCS400 CAD colors        Simulated non Oc   printer  vivid colors         Simulated non Oc   printer  match screen colors       Simulated non Oc   printer  no color correction                   None  managed by application         The output quality ofa simulated non Oc   printer setting depends on the selected input  profile for simulated printers  Make sure you use the correct input profile for simulated  printers     Oc   ColorWave 600 path  Support   Input profiles     Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 351    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Color management settings for PostScript and PDF files   RGB input           Color management settings for PostScript and PDF files    RGB input     The default settings are emphasized     Input profile Color Management settings                 Input da    Standardization    Color feel    Rendering intent  ta    RGB a  sRGB   m  AdobeRGB     CMYK m  Euroscale coat     Oc   enhanced colors   Perceptual  pho              Oc   CAD colours          ed  to        Euroscale un  m    Saturation  business  coated    graphics       a  US 
27.   When you select  Color   you are invited to define the  Color mode     Select      Printer s color feel    to use the default value set on the printer     Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 271    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Advanced         Rendering    settings        Document s color feel       to use the color feel embedded into to the file  This  information was set by the application that created the    file           Oc   enhanced colors          Predefined color feel             to manually fine tune the combination of the color  input data and    Rendering intent        to fine tune the rendering of the printed colors              Color mode      Oc   enhanced colors       When the color feel is set to  Oc   enhanced colors   you can define the color settings for    the selected file     Click  Edit  to open the  Edit Colors Settings    window and configure the settings     m the RGB data interpretation   sRGB  or    Adobe RGB      m the CMYK data interpretation   Euroscale coated      Euroscale uncoated      US Web  coated  SWOP   or  US Web uncoated     This setting is not available for HPGL 2     HPGL or HP RTL files     m the    Rendering intent        Perceptual  photo      Saturation  business graphics         Absolute  colorimetric        Relative colorimetric         i  Note     The availability of the print settings depends on the format of the file      i  Note     For a file  the default value of each color setting is the def
28.   Work with media profiles    section of the on line help     m Download a media profile from the web site  on page 286    mUpload a media profile  on page 287    Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system 285    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Download a media profile from the Oc   web site       Download a media profile from the Oc   web site    When to do    When a new media profile is available or an existing media profile needs to be updated  you can retrieve the required media profile from the corporate web site     How to download a media profile from the Oc   web site      Visit http   mediaguide oce com     Click  Continue  in the Wide format printer section     Select Oc   ColorWave 600 in the Printer name section and click    Continue        Select one or more media types and click  Continue        Click on  Profiles        Select the correct media profile and click    Download      Download the file to a location on your workstation     an A WV PY    Result    If you have problems downloading the file  please contact the Oc   Helpdesk   The next step is to upload the media profile to the Oc   ColorWave 600 controller        mUpload a media profile  on page 287    286 Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Upload a media profile       Upload a media profile    When to do    When you have downloaded the new or updated media profile from the corporate we
29.   a File download Enable  4 Miscellaneous  Allow META REFRESH Enable  Launching applications and unsafe files Enable    Use Pop up blocker Disable  Scripting    Active scripting       Set the minimum browser security settings for Firefox 2   3    Step   Action    Enable    Accept cookies from sites Enable       Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 93    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set another language for the Oc   Express WebTools       Set another language for the Oc   Express WebTools    Introduction    The language setting of the internet browser you use defines the language in which the  user interface of the Oc   Express WebTools is displayed      i  Note     This language setting does not influence the language on the user panel  On the user  panel you can only toggle between the  First language    and the  Second language     You  can define the values for the  First language    and the  Second language    in the regional  settings of the Oc   Express WebTools  see    Configure the regional settings of the Oc   Col   orWave 600   on page 119       i  Note     If the selected language cannot be supported  the standard user interface language for  the Oc   Express WebTools will be US English     Purpose    Change the language setting of the user interface of the Oc   Express WebTools      i  Note     If the selected language cannot be supported  the standard user interface language for  the Oc   Express WebTools will be US English     How to change
30.   operator     user in Oc   Publisher Copy   Reprint the job if needed        Submission error    or  Pro    The submission to the printer  cessing Error   Job aborted   failed or the printer has aborted  by system     the job due to an error    Check the connection to the  printer  check the availability of  the printer  and reprint the job           i  Note     When the job is in  Waiting    status because the media is unavailable  the name of one  missing media is displayed in a tooltip  Position the mouse over the job to display the  tooltip     Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 247    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Track and manage a submitted job       Track and manage a submitted job    Introduction    From the  Jobs  window you can track and manage a submitted job     Attention   A To manage all jobs on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printer go to the  Jobs  tab in the Oc    Express WebTools     View the status of a submitted job  1  Check the  Status  of     m the current    Active jobs     m the current active jobs  in the    Active jobs  section   m the completed jobs  in the  History  section     See the list of statuses and possible causes in Job    Status    on page 246   2  See the additional information when available  in the    Information    field      Cancel a job after submission    1  In the    Active jobs  section  select the job to be canceled   2  Click  Cancel job      The job status changes into    canceling      Then the job appears 
31.   ported by the printer      urn com           300 Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Define the media type and the core size       Define the media type and the core size    How to define the media type and the core size    Action    If the displayed media type and core size is correct you  can press  Next  and go to step 4    Otherwise  press  Other media  and continue with step  i     Use the    Scroll wheel    to select the correct media type  from the list and confirm your entry with the  Confir   mation key        Note    If the correct media type is not available on  your printer operator panel  you must first  make a new media profile available on the  printer operator panel   see Make a new media  profile available on the printer operator panel     on page 161     Use the    Scroll wheel    to select the correct core size for    your new media roll and confirm your entry with the     Confirmation key      Note   The standard roll core size for the  Oc   Color     Wave   600 Printer  is 3         Illustration    Now mema Getected on rem f    Prosi the    nt if the Gtiplaget rete  De ts Correct If ret  press       ate    Select Tee mede two ter ret 1    Hehe hee CL CONE    Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system 301    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Define the media type and the core size    Illustration    Use the    Scroll wheel    to select t
32.  187  Current date and time   Current date and time         cccecceeeeeeees 83  119  Custom print length   Custom print length wo    eects 137  Customer Analysis Tool   demo PriNt safscsisdsces tos cbedbsdatdecssescassdsscosceasessonsse 84    Cut the media    Gutthe media sissess  isessessccsceacascescassevensseesecie 190    D    Default copy template    Change sd cisradistiagasiiasatienierdecsiaacraeateres 236    Default passwords    Oc   Express WebTools oo    114    Default settings    CONCEDE ciessseacessarciesssosentessasdissesedevesissscseasstiees 118    Define    core size of the media  o   eeecceeeseesseeesees 125  281  125  281  Media type errire EAEE 301    media sizes       Definition  CMYK color space ai svscacertsivsecscsccsisrssstes  color feel se isscai ss scsesssodsvdvovevesssdsedesevsssudieszsnasys  color management          eee  input profile   standardization      output profile wee  rendering intents 0    ceeeeeeeeseees  RGB Color spacer sinian   Delete    AGEIVE JOD APPP O EE 217  Smart INDON semanan DERENAN 201    Delivery destination  Delivery destination     Demo print  customer analysis tool            Quality Reference Chart  Direct copy mode    Disables ae are r ARER AN 242  Aisabled ics ssssevsecesesdcbaes seb desdeesecsdeseasassndeshgseese 255  Enable  oea aa N N AARE 242  enabled eiaeaen aR E NEETA 253    Disable Direct copy mode    Disable Direct copy mode 0    242    Display language  Display language  alternative sisis    default siz  cisd  as
33.  369  Mixed contentiones lob ads advent aitia saudien eaei daadaa hana iias 370  BUSINESS QraphiCS eee ccictseeeseishece teeters ceeretiasesncetivnees anaa ai EEEa 372  SD CAD a ee EN e aa 373  Check  analyze and solve output quality problems of print jobs        375  Banding across the print with differences in color and gloss      375  Horizontal  wavy lines across your PFiNt           cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeesssseeseees 377  Thin horizontal  coloued or white lines across your print             379  Calibrate the Oc   ColorWave 600 printel                    ssssssessseeeeeeees 381       Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Contents          Calibration error COCES        ccccccccccccceeeeeceeceeseeesesessssensssneanseeeeeeeeeeess 385   Chapter 9   License MANAGCIMEM is  0  cecic fisdeteeceedetecs cetera esviscccel evetsecaucedecaesutualageesetucassens 387  Introduction to Managing LiCENSES             esceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaees 388  The  Licenses  tab in the Oc   Express WebTOOIS            ccccceceeeseeeseeees 389  The basic workflow of  Support       Licenses    activation    390  Oc   License LOGIC            cccceeceeeseceeeeeeeeeeee cee eee eaeee eaan Ea AAE ENN 391  The structure of license files ANd liCENSES           cccssccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeseeees 392  Check your liC NS S           c ccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeens 394  Save the currently active liCENSES            ccsscccssceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeessseeseeees 396 
34.  7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system 287    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Upload a media profile       Note   Li  If an older version of the file was active on the controller  this file will be overwritten by  the new file        Download a media profile from the web site  on page 286    288 Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The  Media drawer       Replace a media roll    The    Media drawer       Illustration       Component   function table       Attention   A Only use intact media rolls  Dented media rolls can damage the  Imaging devices        Nr Component Description   Function    Media roll 3 or 5 in other media drawers    Media roll 4 or 6 in other media drawers     Roll holder  Carries the media roll          Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system 289    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The    Media drawer          Nr Component     Roll loading station      Roll loader     optional        Description   Function    Groove integrated behind the front cover of   the media drawer    To load new media on the printer  the opera    tor must proceed as follows   m place the new media roll temporarily on  the roll loading station   m insert the roll holder into the new media  roll   m place the roll holder with the new media  roll in the correct roll position    Helps the operator to load a media roll     290 Chapter 
35.  9   License management    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals         You see the following     m All current active demo licenses  m All new active demo licenses     Note   You cannot see the current active resale  licenses at this point        The structure of license files and licenses       Situation    Preview the resale licenses during  the license activation job if you  use the license file that contains  the resale licenses     Preview the demo and resale li   censes during the license activa     tion job if you use the saved li   censes of your back up file     The license activation job is fin     ished     Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       What do you see    You see the following   m All current active resale licenses  m All new active resale licenses     Note   You cannot see the current active demo  licenses at this point     You see the following    a All demo licenses that were active at the time  you created the back up file   a All resale licenses that were active at the time  you created the back up file    You see the following   m All current active demo licenses  All new active demo licenses  All current active resale licenses  All new resale licenses  All current other not active options     Chapter 9   License management 393    Check your licenses       Check your licenses    About the licenses    The    Support       Licenses  tab in the Oc   Express WebTools allows you to manage the  licenses that are active on your system  A li
36.  A repro environment is a working environment where a repro operator handles all the  jobs  In this environment the repro operator can use the    Smart Inbox  to organize his  daily work     Illustration  i    How to set up the repro workflow    1  Open the  Preferences     System properties    tab en select  Edit  in the  Job management     bar     2  Enter the following values  example      Setting Value       Restrict remote actions on jobs to the  operator                   Display a view on all Smart Inbox jobs           Keep completed jobs in the Smart Inbox                 Expiration time out for Smart Inbox For example  8 hours    jobs           198 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Use Smart Inboxes in a multiple user and repro environment       Use Smart Inboxes in a multiple user and repro environment    Introduction    A multiple user and repro environment is a working environment where both users di   rectly send jobs to the printer and collect their own prints and the system is also used by  a repro operator  In this environment it is important for a user to have easy access to his    personal jobs  but it is also important for the repro operator to have an overview of all  jobs     Illustration    iy    IN 7     How to set up the end user and repro workflow    1  Open the  Preferences     System properties    tab en select  Edit  in the  Job management       bar     2  Enter the following values  example      S
37.  BS arikoa iK RE 314  Print quality   MAIN SEDES sessiossa siise 312 317  Print settings   Print SECC GS sasini ipren sovesessisaiaces 136   CCOMOMAY aN AE 317    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Oce Print Assistant     sesssesesessesesessosesesoestsesee 317  OVERVIEW a E EEN 317  presentatiON soinnin oriin 317  producto sssini iiis 317    Print surface  Printistitface   4  issciss sasdaiseiveci dices aissiiivtese       check and clean  Print templates    For Oc   Publisher Copy       cceeeeseeeneeeeees 237  Print while RIP   Print while RIP      ccccceceseessessesseseeseeseeeees 329  Printer   Connect  isissscccceses    display language         PAUSE  ics ciessssssssevtertesdeadussensescscensandesttebenipionss   prepare for USE rirnan ar R RA   PESU E e PE E E RESE   SPECUACATIODS  soiorns zizes   SWACCHL OLE ssiccssevsca eeraa E TREE ae   SWIED ON assen  Printer operator panel       Printer operator panel      ssssssssesssssisrsereeseseenees 31  configuration screen  display language           home screen ssc  scdicsscnsxesagiveavscacedasiacascaxesstasentea  maintenance screen          quete  SCLEEN  a giors earr aE EEEE RRN   Smart inbox screen   SYSTEM SCLOEM  ssiessccossssssssssienssseessisadsisonstensseneiis   TUNE OUD  sean a ET  Printer software   UPCate sissies iea r eieaa 102  Printer working area   Printer working area  s ssssssessessississiesresiesresees 23  Printing system   consumables sssssisssssssssiansnssis nna 22   OVELVIEW  stisi miesecssisstic
38.  Cancel    to reject your entries     324 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the  PDF wipeout correction          Set the  PDF wipeout correction       Introduction    The  PDF wipeout correction    setting allows you to print PDF documents containing  unusual solid black areas which mask some parts of the drawing  When enabled  these  PDF documents will be printed correctly but the processing of the PDF files will be  slower  When disabled the correction is not applied     Before you begin    This setting is editable for the Key operator or Power user     How to set the  PDF wipeout correction       1  Click  Preferences     Print job defaults       2  Click  Edit  in the  Postscript PDF rasterization settings    bar or click the value of the     PDF wipeout correction    setting      Select the correct value     we    4  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or  Cancel  to reject your entries     Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 325    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the  Long plot mode          Set the  Long plot mode       Introduction    The  Long plot mode  setting allows you to produce prints with a print length up to 175  meters    When the  Long plot mode  is disabled you can produce prints with a print length up to  22 meters  The print quality matches the print quality that you defined for your print  job    When the  Long plot mode  is enabled you can produce prints w
39.  Color mode      Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 315    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the  Color mode          Set the  Color mode       Introduction     i    Use the Oc   Express WebTools to set the printer s default setting for the  Color mode   for a print job     Note    Ifyou set a value for this setting in your print job submission application  Oc   Windows    printer driver or Oc   Publisher Select  and the Oc   job ticket is enabled  the value of  this setting will overrule the default value     You can choose one of the following options   m  Grayscale     The system only prints grayscale  The print speed increases in the grayscale mode   m  Color   The Oc   ColorWave 600 prints all the colors     Before you begin    This setting is editable for the Key operator or Power user     How to set the color mode    1  Click  Preferences    Print job defaults       2  Click  Edit  in the  Basic  bar or click the value of the    Color mode  setting   3    4  Select  Color  if the print quality is the most important factor     Select  Grayscale  if the print productivity is the most important factor     Note    The color  black  also looks nicer when printed in the color mode    Color     In that case  all colors  cyan  magenta  yellow and black  are used to produce black  and not only black  toner       Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or  Cancel  to reject your entries     316 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Download
40.  ERRE    media types    Minimum browser security settings for Oc   Express    WebTools    for Firefox 2 1 3 ascisccdeseccesastsacsveavicvest diese    for Internet Explorer 6            for Internet Explorer 7   8  Mirror    MIOT cirea eer creeper reer cee    Mixed content    advised Settingiano ssri    Model name    Model name iss dscccscecssisaideiseissed agsaesstiaceses    Move the printer    Move the Printera    N  NetBIOS    NetBIOS upraise in n    Network cable    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Network cable sisieesscssescsssceisesceccesssaicisssbesaseves 50  Network duplex mode   Network duplex mode occ 128  Network settings   Network settings     ss sssssessssssesiesissresesrississesreese   COMA CULATION  scsesscesescossisicoseossienisnsssseves sesibess   configure manually                Oc   Express WebTools  Network settings in the  Network speed   Network speed c cscssiesisecsscsessscvisesssessessevasoases 129  New   WC SSCS   criias 108  397  Non  media types  Nozzle dropout   PODS kaa EERE TE 379  Number of overwrite passes   Number of overwrite passes     s  ssssssesrsssse1se e 117  Number of sets   Number of sets      cccecessssseseseessseeeseeseeseeees 136       O   Oc   Express WebTools  change the language    s ss seessissisrierisrierresrerrenres  configurator TAD  iscetessirsecesstoseteserseonsserisoiorsd  jobs tab isisisi  load the settings from a file             l  g ARs sescsavisesestaveasscesissesateiese   network settings     ccsesee
41.  Foot  cover     Push the handle  1   The  Foot   snaps up  2      Repeat action 1 till 3 on the   Lower right cover           46 Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       How to move the Oc   ColorWave 600    Illustration    Move the Oc   ColorWave 600  printer     Note   Be aware of the printer  working area     Pull out the left  Foot   1  until  it touches the ground and locks   2   You should hear a click as it  locks     Note    If you do not hear a  click  place your foot on  the foot of the printer   1  and at the same time  push gently against the  printer until you hear    the click     Replace the  Foot  covers  Place  the pin into the notch        Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started 47    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    How to move the Oc   ColorWave 600    Illustration    Replace the  Lower left cover        Place the pin into the notch              48 Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    How to move the Oc   ColorWave 600    Illustration    Repeat action 6 till 8 at the right  hand side  Replace the  Lower  right cover        Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started 49    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    How to connect the network cable    Connect the Oc   ColorWave 600 printer    How to connect the network cable    Action Illustration   
42.  From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       User Preferences       The default settings section   User Preferences       Illustration    Boer sietomhemees Doerner f ee hetero    E Cwect copy mode s dasbisd Scarred docmerts we collected    a pi You Can pe documents and edit matting  before pring Duis ky    Corer  ngv oute te pre adima Dy mens amr 4       to    j Gt vweteterse crt  ot       3    Dt We Ottetiat   HOA Oe a    2 as        cr ake    E   EE      EE      E SE                  How to set the    User Preferences     1  Click  User Preferences    in the Oc   Publisher Copy default settings section  upper right  corner     2  Select the  Language    you want to apply to the client application    3  Inthe    Measurement unit  section  select  Inch  or    Millimeter        4  Click  OK        234 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Change printer        Change printer       Illustration       Publisher Copy          How to change the printer  1  Click  Change printer    in the Oc   Publisher Copy default settings section  upper right    corner    The application is disconnected from the current printer   2  Enter the Host Name of the Oc   ColorWave 600 printer that must be used for your copy    jobs   3  Click  Login      Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 235    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Change the default Publisher Copy print  copy  template    Change the default Publisher Copy print  copy 
43.  IJ Tossi  Dmae J 50 Al ro 09  BSO Al rl C54 mend 2   cst te the mope sme          ARCH wall Cob wach     190 Al rol  94 am   tember of pager l       Sheet   f  ESO A C86 x Bad me  J ESO A rel cama mmmh   fe A2 Cinch  lt 2 ech oot      ARC E  96 x 48 eh  f ARCA E vol  28 eh   ESO AD  420 x GHA man    BHO A2 rol  CD ed   f  ESO A C36   4 me  J ESO AD rol CAE md   f  ESO AD OBA  x 1309 man  JED AD rod  PAE ma    fe ESO AS G9  x 20 mmn  f EPO AF rod  42 ew       ARON D  24 x 36 inch    AROE roll  38 nch  O50 CoterWove 609   fe DO AR  C0 x 04 meen  f ESO A1 rol  394 owh nt patt  We  ed  Cech meeen    ang                Media     You can manually select in the lists the    Media type  and the  Media size    to be used   The lists display all the media  type and size  enabled on the printer   A roll status icon indicates if a specific media type on the printer is available  empty or    loaded     When you select a  Roll  in the  Media size     the media is cut to the size of the image   To cut to a standard sheet size  select a    Sheet size        Note    Li  If you select a media not loaded on the printer  or if the roll is empty  and submit the  job  the job status will turn into  Waiting      Media not currently loaded on the printer     and the job will be held until you load the selected media     266 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Advanced       Media    settings       Note   Li   Warning    in case of folding  
44.  Installa NEW VICENS Eosin aaa aa 397   Appendix A   Specifications of the Oc   ColorWave G00             cc ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeessneeeees 399  Specifications  Oc   PowerM controller      Oc   PowerM Plus controller  Wei esd P c tae A EA AN AA E AA A AE 400  Specifications Oc   ColorWave 600 printer            cccccceeceesssseeesseesseneeees 403  Preferred Oc   media types and SIZECS             ccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 408  Support for non Oc   media types and SIZES            ccceeeceeseeeeesssnenseeeees 413  Specifications drivers and job submission SOftWALE             ccseeeees 415   Appendix B   Reader s comment Sheet             cccccceeeeeeeseeessseeeseeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseessssssaaee 417  Reader s comment ShHEEt          cccccccsccccceeceeceeeeeeceessseesssesecseneanseeeseeeeeeees 418   Appendix C   Addresses of local Oc   organizations                     s cceeeeeeeeeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeed 421  Addresses of local Oc   organisations              eeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 422   10    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Chapter 1  Introduction    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Notes for the reader       Notes for the reader    Introduction    This manual helps you to use the Oc   ColorWave 600  The manual contains a description    of the product and guidelines to use and operate the Oc   ColorWave 600     Definition    Attention Getters    Parts of this manual require your special attention  These par
45.  Introduction    The Oc   ColorWave 600 supports printing through FTP   If you send your print job through FTP the default Oc   Express WebTools settings are  leading     Note   Li  You must enable printing through FTP in the Oc   Express WebTools     How to send a print job via FTP    You can print the files through FTP in the following ways    m Via acommand line prompt   m Enter the address ftp    lt hostname or IP address gt   jobs in your workstation browser     Via an FTP application   m From a Web browser    The Oc   ColorWave 600 has a dedicated FTP Jobs folder  You cannot delete or change  this folder  It is created at installation and protected  The most convenient way to print  files through FTP is to drag and drop the files or to copy and paste the files  into this   Jobs  folder on the FTP site of your Oc   ColorWave 600 controller  The documents in  the folder are printed on the Oc   ColorWave 600     Web browsers that support job submission through FTP       Level of functionality Web browser   Operation    Supports drag and drop of   Microsoft   Internet Ex  Drag the jobs into the       files plorer 6 0  or higher     Jobs    folder on the FTP  Mozilla Firefox    1 5  or   site of your Oc   Color   higher  Wave 600    Supports copy and paste   Microsoft   Internet Ex  Paste the jobs into the   of files  plorer 6 0  or higher     Jobs    folder on the FTP  Mozilla Firefox    1 5  or   site of your Oc   Color   higher  Wave 600           Chapter 5   Use the prin
46.  Not authorized     You are not authorized to use the  function  you need to get a license for the function   Expired     Your license was a temporary license  You  need to get a new license to use the function           License type    This field displays one of the following license types   m    Resale      a    Demo        This field displays the time your license is valid   This field displays a license number        Chapter 9   License management 395    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Save the currently active licenses       Save the currently active licenses    Introduction    You can save all current active licenses of different licenses types into one single file     Purpose  Save the current active licenses for the following purposes     m Collect and save all active licenses of different types into one single file  m Create a back up file before you start a license activation job     When to do    Save the current active licenses before you start a license activation job or to save the  current license situation     How to save the license information    1  Click    Support       Licenses  to display the license information page   2  You need to log on as System administrator or Power user if you are not logged on already   3  Click the  Save    button   The  Save licenses    window opens   4  Select a directory  enter the file name and click the  Save  button to back up the currently  active licenses     Result    All currently active resale and demo 
47.  Reference Chart    on page 355      i  Note     For optimal print quality please verify that the name of the loaded media corresponds  with the media name on the printer operator panel     Setting Advised value Advised rendering intent  value       Color feel       Oc   enhanced colors       Perceptual  photo         Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 369    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Mixed content    Mixed content       The advised settings    You can also find an overview of the advised settings on the Quality Reference Chart  This chart gives an overview of the different types of print files and the print settings and  color management settings that give the best output result for these print files    The Quality Reference Chart is available as a demo print on the printer operator panel    see    How to print the Quality Reference Chart   on page 355      i  Note     For optimal print quality please verify that the name of the loaded media corresponds  with the media name on the printer operator panel     Setting Advised value Advised rendering intent  value       370 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Mixed content    value       Color feel       Oc   CAD colours  not applicable    Setting Advised value Advised rendering intent       or     Oc   enhanced colors     Relative colorimetric       Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 371    Downloaded From ManualsPrinte
48.  Remove the cover of the  Con   nection panel    at the rear side of  the printer        Lead the connection cable  through the cover     Connect one side of the data ca   ble  UTP cable with a RJ45  connector  to the indicated net   work connection on the connec   tion panel of the  Oc   PowerM  controller       Connect the other side of the  network cable to your company  network              50 Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    How to connect the network cable    Illustration    Place the cover of the  Connec   tion panel           Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started 51    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    How to connect the mains supply cable    How to connect the mains supply cable    Illustration    Plug in the  Power  cable at the  power connection on the  Con   nection panel    at the back of the    printer   Put the other side of the  Power   cable into the socket     Note   Make sure the main  power switch is in    off       position           52 Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       How to switch on the printer    How to switch on the printer    Action Illustration    Switch on the green main switch  at the rear side of the Oc   Color   Wave 600     Switch on the Oc   ColorWave    On   Off switch     19   600 at the front side of the    printer        Chapter 3   Prepare 
49.  Repeat step 1 to 3 for the second  metal guide           188 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Adjust the  Top delivery tray       Illustration    Check if both metal guides are  in the same position and run  parallel to the top delivery plates  below the guides  Adjust the po     sition if necessary        Chapter 5   Use the printing system 189    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Cut the media    Cut the media    Introduction    When a media jam occurs  one of the steps to solve the problem is to cut the jammed  media  The printer operator panel displays the following message     Push beck the metal plate thet  Fetses the media end cut the mete  Then place back the unite and       How to cut the media    Action Illustration    Use your right hand to push   down the metal plate that guides  the media  Use your left hand to  cut the media from left to right  with the knife behind the front    cover     Again  push down the metal  plate that guides the media to  place the knife back into the    original position              190 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Create  manage and print jobs          Create print jobs    Create  manage and print jobs    Introduction    In a normal workflow environment you can identify several components that enable you  to create  manage and print jobs     Illustration    Function   Component Application    Create Oc   Expr
50.  Setting     Oc   Print Assistant          360 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    2D CAD and rendering    Setting Advised value Advised rendering intent  value       Color feel       Oc   CAD colours  not applicable       or     Oc   enhanced colors     Relative colorimetric       Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 361    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Map    Map       The advised settings    You can also find an overview of the advised settings on the Quality Reference Chart  This chart gives an overview of the different types of print files and the print settings and  color management settings that give the best output result for these print files    The Quality Reference Chart is available as a demo print on the printer operator panel    see    How to print the Quality Reference Chart   on page 355      i  Note     For optimal print quality please verify that the name of the loaded media corresponds  with the media name on the printer operator panel     Setting Advised value Advised rendering intent  value     Print Setting     Oc   Print Assistant             Color feel       Oc   enhanced colors       Relative colorimetric       362 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Logo and business colors       Logo and business colors    You can also find an overview of the advised settings on the Quality Reference Chart  This char
51.  Smart Inbox  The  Preferences     System properties       Job management        Keep completed jobs in the Smart Inbox  setting determines if jobs that have been  printed will be kept in the Smart Inbox for reprint or not     Note   Li  The icon in front of the job name provides status information about the job  Detailed  information about the status is displayed in the tooltip      i  Note     When a Smart Inbox contains many jobs you can sort the jobs by clicking on a column  name  for example  Job name  or  Time created      You can also change the display method  of the jobs in the Smart Inbox  Select  List view  if you want to display all jobs  Select   Group view    if you want to display only the groups of your sort criterion in the Smart  Inbox      Delete all     If you click  Delete all    in the  View all  Smart Inbox all jobs are deleted from all Smart  Inboxes      i Note     The  View all  Smart Inbox is only available if you enable the  Preferences     System  properties       Job management       Display a view on all Smart Inbox jobs  setting     Chapter 5   Use the printing system 195    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The  Smart Inbox  and Jobs Queue concept       Job Queue functionality     View job information   To view the job information click on the job name in the queue      Top   To increase the print priority of a job in the queue you can select the job and click  Top   to place the job on top of the queue      Delete   To delete a jo
52.  Standard  to cut the print to a standard media  size  DIN  ANSI         m Select   Synchro    to cut the print at the end of the im   age  The system cuts at the measured length of the  original times the scale factor    m Select   Custom     numeric  to cut the print on a speci   fied length  The print length is defined by value of the  setting  Custom print length              Custom print length      Print length if the  Print cut method    is set to   Custom         Add leading strip    When you enter a value  the Oc   ColorWave 600 adds a  blank strip of the specified length at the beginning of the  output      Add trailing strip  When you enter a value  the Oc   ColorWave 600 adds a  blank strip of the specified length at the bottom of the  output                 Overview of the  Print job defaults       Layout     Editable for Key operator and Power user     Preferences       Print job defaults         Layout       138 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the default print job settings       Setting    Scale       Description       Scales the image with a defined percentage or automatically  to the media size    100  is no scaling           Rotation             Rotates the image counterclockwise  Select one of the    auto  rotate    modes to print faster due to less media transport   Select  auto rotate media saving    to use the media in the  most efficient way         see Set the  Rotation  mode    on page 33
53.  The basic concept of the licenses     How to manage the licenses     388 Chapter 9   License management    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The    Licenses    tab in the Oc   Express WebTools       The    Licenses    tab in the Oc   Express WebTools    Introduction    The    Support         Licenses    tab has the following possibilities     Possibilities    a View the current active licenses   m Get the host id of the Oc   system   m Save the active licenses   m  You can activate new licenses or saved licenses     Chapter 9   License management 389    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The basic workflow of  Support     Licenses  activation       The basic workflow of  Support     Licenses  activation    Introduction    Before you can work with licenses  you must access to the Oc   Express WebTools  The  following workflow describes per step when to use which possibility     The workflow    1  View the current active licenses     You can make a list of new options you need and make a list of license numbers  Oc    needs the list of new options and the license numbers to create a new license file     2    Get the host id of the Oc   system     Oc   needs the host id of your Oc   system to create a new license file   3  Send the list of new options you need  the list of license numbers and the host id to Oc     Oc   creates and delivers one or more new license files      gt     Create a back up of the current active licenses if necessary     Save the c
54.  a document in color on the Oc   ColorWave 600 the color infor   mation that is defined in the files can be set in the different steps of the process from  document creation to document production  In order to get the best output results you  need to be aware of these methods to define the color information of the document you  want to print     The color information that you can create in the various steps described below each have  a different priority  When you create a document that you want to print in color  the  priority of the color settings is also illustrated in the table below     Stages in the process of making a color print Priority  Document 1   The color settings are already embedded in the document  only applicable   for PDF files      Application  The color settings can be defined in the application that you use to create  or edit the document   You can set the following parameters in the application   m Set color or black and white   m Define the input profile  RGB input data or CMYK input data    see What is an input profile   standardization     on page 333   You cannot define this for a PDF file   m Define the rendering intents    see    Definition of rendering intents    on page 338     Note   You can only overrule the color settings of a PDF file with an    Adobe   application such Adobe Acrobat   for example        Printer drivers 3  The Oc   Windows   Printer Driver offers color management settings    You can select the required color management setti
55.  and  Duplicate  it     or  m Select an existing scan template from the Template Library    and edit the    Properties        Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 251    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Define a Publisher Copy scan template    2  Edit or define the scan template settings  Make sure that you select Publisher Copy as  the  Destination                          Ky operator    3  Click  OK  to confirm your entries    4  Drag and drop the new Publisher Copy scan template on an existing scan template in  the  Templates on the scanner operator panel    section  In the overview and on the scanner  operator panel  the existing scan template is immediately replaced by the new Publisher  Copy scan template     252 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Basic copy job    Do a basic copy job     Direct copy mode     enabled     Basic copy job    Before you begin  Make sure that  Direct copy mode  is enabled  See    Enable or disable  Direct copy mode       on page 242      How to do a basic copy job    1  Place the original face down and right aligned   The scanner takes the original         269  Place the original face down and right aligned     2  Select a Publisher Copy scan template or change the    Destination    of an existing scan  template to Publisher Copy   3  Change the scan settings if necessary and press the green start key     Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 253    Downloaded F
56.  can perform an additional check to identify the problem if you measure the distance  between the wavy lines  Each print mode has a typical distance between the wavy lines   The following table describes the relation between the print modes and the distances   The relation between the print modes and the distances between the lines    Print mode Typical distance between the lines    Economy mode 42 mm       Production mode 21mm    Cause of the problem       The paper steps are not correct  The following table describes the relation between the  paper steps and the lines on your print     The relation between the paper steps and the lines  When Then    The paper steps are too big The print will show light lines       The paper steps are too small The print will show dark lines    Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 377    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Horizontal  wavy lines across your print       Illustration           346  Example of horizontal  wavy lines across the Customer Acceptance Test    How to solve the problem    1   2     Check if the correct media setting is used    Check if the media name on the printer operator panel matches the media that you cur   rently use    Print the Customer Acceptance Test    This test print contains 10 colored bars    Check if the test print shows white or dark lines across all colors  The lines usually appear  at equal distances from each other    If yes  calibrate the media via the printer operator panel  
57.  cancel the job     Ready to print    The job has been analyzed and the printer confirms that the   job is ready to print   It is still possible to cancel the job       Printing    The job is being printed    Canceling the job may not abort the printing       Printed    The printed output is available       Waiting    The job is in attention state  The system is waiting for a human  intervention  The printer needs attention       canceling    The user has requested to cancel the job and action is not fin   ished yet  the cancellation of the job has not been confirmed  by the printer        canceled    The job has been canceled  in the application or on the  Printer  operator panel          Error    One of the steps of the print process has failed       Stored    The job is stored in the  Smart Inbox            Information on status    When available  additional information about the status of the job is displayed in the       Information    field     246 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Job  Status        When the  Status    And the message is        Printer Waiting For Media      Load the required media onto  or    Waiting for accounting   the printer or enter accounting  information     information at the printer before  the job can be printed    When there are more than 1  reason why a job is waiting  the  main reason is displayed        canceled       Job aborted by user or by   The job has been canceled by the
58.  car    Carriage that contains 8 imaging devices     2 Cyan  Imaging devices      2 Magenta    Imaging devices     2 Yellow    Imaging devices      2 Black  Imaging devices           Resolution Addressable raster  1 200 dpi    Toner car   Toner cartridge    that contains 500 grams disposable  Oc   Ton   tridge    and erPearls            Oc   Ton  m Oc   developed   erPearls   500 grams CMYK cartridges    Closed Toner Feeding Station  Re fill while printing             Oc   Ton   Oc   TonerPearls    indication on the    Printer operator panel  erPearls    level and remote  monitoring Out of  Oc   TonerPearls   signalling   Visible through transparent  Toner cartridge     Note   Refillable during printing  Print modes      Economy   m  Production   m    Presentation     Print speed  Economy   m Print speed around half a minute per Ao  portrait      Production     m Print speed around one minute per Ao  portrait      Presentation     m Print speed around 3 minutes per Ao  portrait         Appendix A   Specifications of the Oc   ColorWave 600 403    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Specifications Oc   ColorWave 600 printer             Maximum  Economy    productivity m Print speed around half a minute per Ao  portrait      Oc   Print As    The Oc   ColorWave 600 automatically selects the print setting   sistant        Economy      Production  or  Presentation     that best fits the file  with respect to the file content based on coverage  A  Key operator     can use 
59.  digit        56 Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Run the installation wizard from the printer operator panel       Illustration    Use the    Numeric keys    again to enter the serial number  of the printer for verification purpose     orton he serve    Use the  Upper right softkey    to go to the next step  meee RS ter epee    The printer operator panel displays the number of rolls  detected   Use the    Upper right softkey    to go to the next step        S    Use the  Scroll wheel    to select  Yes  when asked if you  want to configure the network settings now   Use the    Upper right softkey    to go to the next step        When you entered a password in the  Configuration      Connectivity     Passwords     Password to change    Thea Pure Hosa bty ni petresrt    network settings    setting in the Oc   Express WebTools    Jee    you must enter the correct password before you can o aaant   configure the network settings  Panswors  E  SSS SSS       Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started 57    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Run the installation wizard from the printer operator panel       Illustration    The following message is displayed     This wizard assists you to connect the printer to the  network       Use the    Upper right softkey    to go to the next step     Select one of the following options         Auto detect  IPv4 only    Use the    Scr
60.  errors related to the processing of print jobs is displayed in the event list   You can open the event list when you click  View events    in the    Jobs    tab     Additional settings to view events    Setting Description      Preferences       System proper    ties     In case of   errors           Job event popup    When this setting is set to  On  the system displays  print job related attention messages on the printer  operator panel  These pop up messages hide all other  information on the screen           Job event web noti  When this setting is set to  On  the system displays  fication    print job related attention messages in the queue view  of the Express Web Tools      i  Note   When you click on an attention message  the  message is removed from the queue view of  the web browser you use   In other web browsers the attention message    remains visible until a user clicks on it        Chapter 5   Use the printing system 223    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Event messages       Event messages    Introduction    You can open the event list when you click  View events    in the    Jobs    tab     Overview event messages    Event message       Partially printed job aborted due  to reception problem  protocol  error  connection failure  spool     full        Troubleshoot    m Check the structure and keywords of the Oc    Job Ticket    m When the user panel displays the message    Job  memory full     delete some jobs from the system    m Check if the p
61.  for your job     see Set the Print Setting       on page 317    m Make sure that you define and load the correct media for your job    see    Overview of the media related settings    on page 280    m Make sure that you define the correct job settings  For example  orientation  rotation   and media type      il Note     When the requested media type is not available on the printer  the printer will give a  media request  Depending on the  Media request time out  settings in the Oc   Express  WebTools  see    Configure the    Media request time out    on page 121   the printer waits  until the media is loaded or the print job will be sent to the queue  hold to  after the  time out has expired     Chapter 5   Use the printing system 193    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The  Smart Inbox  and Jobs Queue concept       The  Smart Inbox    and Jobs Queue concept    Definition    You can use the  Smart Inbox  for customized job management           Concept The Jobs Queue   The Smart Inbox            Metaphor Production belt Personal mailboxes             User intention  m get the job printed as soon as  possible    send jobs to the system  m organize jobs              get feedback of printer  progress  cancel requests    m change priority  local     keep together sets of docu    ments from various origins   m organize documents over var   ious Smart Inboxes  to easily  retrieve jobs   m reprint jobs or change set    tings of jobs that are already   sent to the printe
62.  from a file           Click the  Configuration  tab or the  Preferences  tab      Click  Open set    in the top right hand corner of the screen  A secondary window is  opened      Navigate to a location on the network and select the settings file      Click  Ok  to load the settings file or    Cancel    to close the window without loading the  settings file     S     A Ww    Result    The values of the settings in the settings file overwrite the current values  The network  configuration settings of the system and the passwords are not restored to prevent connec   tivity problems and to guarantee the integrity of the passwords     mSave the currently active licenses  on page 396    Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 99    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load the settings from a file          mUpload a media profile  on page 287    100 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Restore the factory defaults       Restore the factory defaults    When to do    m When you want to restore the factory default settings and values of your Oc   Express  WebTools     Attention    A When you are logged in as a Key operator you can only restore the Key operator settings   When you are logged in as a System administrator you can only restore the System ad   ministrator settings  To restore all the factory default settings you must log in as a Power  user     How to restore the factory defaults    1  Click the    Configur
63.  how to install  configure and use the Job submission application  is available in the documentation provided with Oc   Publisher Select   m the Oc   Publisher Select Online Help  m the Oc   Publisher Select User manual    Illustration       How to use Oc   Publisher Select to send a print job    Step   Action Remarks    1 Start the Oc   Publisher Select   Browse to Start   Programs   Oc   Publish   application  er Select    Configure the default template    You can define a set of settings to be ap     plied by default to every document added  to a job in Oc   Publisher Select  You can  especially activate the  Automatic detec   tion of the legend  for the files to be  folded        Chapter 5   Use the printing system 205    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Use Oc   Publisher Selectto send a print job       206    Step    Action    From the main application win   dow     Jobs      click  New  or open  a saved job to display the  New  Job    window     In the  Job Information    section  set the  Job name     the  Smart  Inbox    and the number and or   der of the job copies    You can also add a banner page  by set  and edit the banner if  necessary          Remarks    In this  New Job  window  you can create   edit  preview  save and print jobs  The  window is divided into 3 sections    1   1  m    Job Composition  m    Job Information      1     1  m    Print Preview    m The default  Job name    is the name of  the first file you added to the job  You  can cu
64.  it is advised to periodically change the password for the 3 access  modes  Key operator  System administrator  Power user  to the Oc   Express WebTools     Attention   A Handle and store all passwords securely and with care  The machine has to be reinstalled  in case of forgotten passwords     How to change the password for authorized users    1  Click  Configuration     Connectivity     Passwords     2  Expand the  Passwords  section    3  Depending on the password you want to change  select  Key operator password        System  administrator password    or    Power user password     A secondary window appears    4  Log in as Key operator to change the key operator password  The default key operator  password is KeyOp   Log in as System administrator to change the system administrator password  The default  system administrator password is SysAdm   Log in as Power user to change all the passwords  The default power user password is  PowUsr      i  Note     The passwords are case sensitive  You can only use characters from the following range   A Z   a z   0 9   a  2           71110    You cannot use Chinese  Cyrillic or Japanese characters     5  Enter the new password twice to confirm your input  The password is hidden   6  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or  Cancel    to reject your entries     114 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Enable or disable the e shredding function       E shredding    Enable or disable 
65.  least 3100 mm x  2270 mm  122 inch x go inch         Chapter 2   Get to know the printing system 23    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The printer hardware components  front     The printer hardware components  front           Illustration  11 13 14 15  2  ae  iggy Dh  j   16    VL A  v  7 17  6 18  5 19  4 20  3  2 21       Component   function table    Component Description   Function     Lower left cover      Media drawer  Media drawer that contains the media roll 5  and or 6    see    The    Media drawer     on page 28      Media drawer  Media drawer that contains the media roll 1  and or 2    see    The    Media drawer    on page 28           Front left cover       Nr   3  Media drawer    Media drawer that contains the media roll 3  and or 4    see    The    Media drawer    on page 28    4   5       Front cover  Door at front  used for error recovery        Upper left cover     24 Chapter 2   Get to know the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       The printer hardware components  front           Description  Function        Description  Function       Toner cartridge     cyan  Toner cassette for cyan  Oc   TonerPearls          Toner cartridge     yellow     Toner cassette for yellow  Oc   TonerPearls         11      Toner cartridge     black     Toner cassette for black  Oc   TonerPearls          12     Toner cartridge     magenta     Toner cassette for magenta  Oc   TonerPearls            13    14    15     Top delivery tray   
66.  left and right hand side    Release the handle of the locking    mechanism     Remove the tapes from the new  media roll  Use both hands  as  indicated  to place the media roll  in the media drawer        Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system 297    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load a media roll    Action Illustration    Keep the media tight on the roll  and in line with the side edge           Use both hands to turn the me   dia roll backwards until the me   dia flap has passed the metal pa   per guide  1                     298 Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load a media roll    Illustration    Use both hands to slide the me   dia under the metal paper guide     A  beep  confirms the correct  paper transport  2         10 Close the media drawer     Note   Do not open the  Media  drawer  during loading           Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system 299    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load a media roll       Illustration    The following screen appears on  the printer operator panel     Now mates detect on rem 1    Meat if the Gtipleyet mesa  Due is Correct If not  press Other  rere    Note    When you load a media  roll the printer automat   ically detects the roll  width  If the detected  roll width is not a stan      en  dard width  the printer   selects the next smaller   roll width that is sup  
67.  non Oc   printer  no color correction                   None  managed by application         The output quality ofa simulated non Oc   printer setting depends on the selected input  profile for simulated printers  Make sure you use the correct input profile for simulated  printers     Oc   ColorWave 600 path  Support   Input profiles     Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 353    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Your Quality Reference Chart       Print examples    Your Quality Reference Chart    Introduction  Get the best out of your Oc   ColorWave 600     Your Quality Reference Chart is available as a demo print on the printer operator panel   The Quality Reference Chart gives an overview of the different types of print files and  the print settings and color management settings that give the best output result for these  print files     354 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Your Quality Reference Chart       Illustration    Ride the wave    of color          How to print the Quality Reference Chart    Step   Action Remarks    1 From the  Home  screen on the printer operator panel    select the  System  tab        Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 355    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Your Quality Reference Chart       Action Remarks    Select the  Maintenance     tab with the upper left softkey     Use the    Scroll wheel    to select  Demo print    and c
68.  or 160  back      LFMo98   Oc   Top Color LFMo98 Top Col       External output  or 160     back    408 Appendix A   Specifications of the Oc   ColorWave 600          Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Preferred Oc   media types and sizes    ae ee Fe  Media Description g m     Name on the Output delivery  code mil Printer operator   or panel    m  LFM110_   Oc   Top Label 6 LFM110 Oc   Top    External output  Label 60  LFM115_   Oc   Top Label 7 LFM115 Oc   Top    Top delivery tray   Label  7  9       LFM116_   Oc   Top Label    u  o  5  5 LFM116 Oc   Top    Top delivery tray   Label  LFM120   Oc   Top Label o LFM120 Oc   Top    Top delivery tray   Label 90  100  80    LFM124   Oc   Top Label LFM124 Oc   Top    Top delivery tray   Label 100  LFM140_   Oc   Green Label LFM140 Oc    Top delivery tray        Green 80    LFM145_   Oc   Recycled Pa  LFM145 Oc  Recy     Top delivery tray   per cled 80   LFM361_   Oc   Self Adhesive   190   LFM361 S A Paper      External output  Paper gog  back      Preferred media types   Europe   Transparent papers       Media   Description g m       Name on the Output delivery  code   mil Printer operator    or panel      mu  LFM251   Oc   Vellum LFM251 Oc   Vel     Top delivery tray   lum 80    Preferred media types   Europe   Films       Media Description g m       Name on the Output delivery  code mil Printer operator  or panel    mu  LFM310   Oc   Polyester Film   88 LFM310 Polyester    Top delivery tray   355  LFM342   Oc   Roll u
69.  point of the carriage unit   At one side  the time between 2 swaths is short  short turn   At the other side  the  crystallization time between 2 swaths is long  long turn   Differences in the crystalliza   tion time of the toner can cause the banding patterns    m The paper steps are not optimal     Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 375    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Banding across the print with differences in color and gloss       Illustration        344  Example of banding across the color print        345  Example of banding across the black white print    How to solve the problem    1  Check if the media name on the  Printer operator panel    matches the media that you  currently use    2  Reprint in  Presentation    mode    3  Check if the test print shows banding    4  Ifyes  calibrate the media via the printer operator panel  Maintenance   Calibrate media     5  Reprint the file    6  Ifdensely printed areas of the reprinted file still show banding  you must contact the Oc    Helpdesk     376 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Horizontal  wavy lines across your print       Horizontal  wavy lines across your print    Description of the problem    Your print contains horizontal  wavy lines across the media     These light or dark lines   m appear in all colors   m can vary in thickness from left to right or vice versa    can become lighter or darker across the media     You
70.  print JODS            cccccessssssssceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeesseesssseseceneaneeeeeeeess 193   What you need to know before you send your print jobs      193   The  Smart Inbox  and Jobs Queue conceft               c0sseeeeeeees 194   Use Smart Inboxes in a multiple user environment                197   Use Smart Inboxes in a repro ENVIFONMENL         ccccccccceeeeeeeees 198    Use Smart Inboxes in a multiple user and repro environment 199       6  Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Contents       Open or create a Smart INDOX       ccccecceeceeeeeeeeeseseesseeessennees 200   Delete a    Smart INDOX           ccccccssssssscceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseessssessssssesees 201   Use Oc   Publisher Express to send a print job           cccccceceees 202   Use Oc   Publisher Selectto send a print job           ccsceceeeeees 205   Use Oc   Windows   Printer Driverto send a print job               207   Use Oc   PostScript   3 Driverto send a print job    209   Use FTP to send a print JOD    ccccccecececeeeeeeeeeeeeesesesssseesseneees 211   Use LPR to send a print jOb     ssssssssssssssnsnrnrrsnrrrssrnnsennsenrennennn nnn 212   Monitor print jODS         cc cesccscccceeceeeeeeeeeeeseessseessssecsneaeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeess 213   The JOD Stata Si iganna eena airea 213    COUNTER NStOry   sicicidhsseabsivercndiededeedt anit aariaa o aaa aa E 214   Control Print JODSiesesicieicseassseceeeceenatds sidedeiedetee scenes ia aana 216   Pause  resume or delete an active job             cccsse
71.  see Set the    Production Plus  setting    on page 321                       1  Economy  monochrome enhanced        see Set the    Economy monochrome enhanced  setting   on page  322        Overview of the  Print job defaults       Sheet     Editable for Key operator and Power user        Preferences       Print job defaults       Sheet     Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 137    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the default print job settings          Setting Description     Media source    The  Media source    setting can be used to select the default  output material and format  The  System  screen of the  printer operator panel will show you what rolls are currently  loaded    You can select  Automatic  or you can select a specific roll  number that the Oc   ColorWave 600 must use by default         Media selection policy      If you select  Media source        Automatic    you can also set  the  Media selection policy    setting    When you select    Automatic next larger  the printer auto   matically selects the media roll with the exact media size  for your print job  If the media roll with the exact media  size is not available the next larger media roll on the printer  is selected    When you select  Automatic exact fit    the printer automat   ically selects the media roll with the exact media size for  your print job  If the media roll with the exact media size  is not available a media request pops up           Print cut method  m Select 
72.  template    Illustration    l Regent mode toe  F fete wade tee     Une wry Vode tee    T hemes oeda we eat ter     Fert at 1 5 ele wd ot to mage toe    OC feet a l ete on a tated pert oe                      How to change the default Publisher Copy print  copy  template       Attention    A The default Publisher Copy print  copy  template that you select here only defines the  default settings for the printer  You can change the scan template settings in the  Templates   workspace  See    Define a Publisher Copy scan template    on page 251         1  Click  Change default copy template    in the Oc   Publisher Copy default settings area   upper right corner     2  Select a different print  copy  template from the drop down list  or  You can create  edit  rename and delete your own print  copy  template   See also    Print   copy  template definition    on page 237    3  Click  OK      236 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Print  copy  template definition       Print  copy  template definition    Definition    In a print  copy  template you can define a set of default print settings for a copy job     A built in print  copy  template is provided by default  Oc   Publisher Copy default  template   It cannot be changed or deleted    You can create  edit  rename and delete your own print  copy  templates    You can set any created print  copy  template as the default template     Content of a template    In a template  y
73.  the Quality Reference Chart  This chart gives an overview of the different types of print files and the print settings and  color management settings that give the best output result for these print files    The Quality Reference Chart is available as a demo print on the printer operator panel    see    How to print the Quality Reference Chart    on page 355      i  Note     For optimal print quality please verify that the name of the loaded media corresponds  with the media name on the printer operator panel     value     Print Setting     Oc   Print Assistant       Setting Advised value Advised rendering intent          Color feel     Oc   CAD colours  not applicable    Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 359    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    2D CAD and rendering       2D CAD and rendering       The advised settings    You can also find an overview of the advised settings on the Quality Reference Chart  This chart gives an overview of the different types of print files and the print settings and  color management settings that give the best output result for these print files    The Quality Reference Chart is available as a demo print on the printer operator panel    see    How to print the Quality Reference Chart   on page 355      i  Note     For optimal print quality please verify that the name of the loaded media corresponds  with the media name on the printer operator panel     Setting Advised value Advised rendering intent  value     Print
74.  the active licenses   m Perform a license activation job   You can activate new licenses or saved licenses     License information overview    Click    Support       Licenses  to view the available licenses     You can view the license information for the following purposes   m Check the active licenses on license state  license type and license duration     Check how long a demo license is valid   m View all options available for your Oc   system   The list of options depends on the type and version of the Oc   system     m Make a list of new options you need   m Make a list of license numbers        Information Description       This field displays the name of the option   For Oc   ColorWave 600 the following licenses are available   Oc   ColorWave 600 license  Oc   Account Logic  Adobe   PostScript     3   PDF  Adobe   Simplified Chinese PostScript    Adobe   Traditional Chinese PostScript      Adobe   Japanese PostScript    Adobe   Korean PostScript         Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 105    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Check your licenses       Information Description    State    This field displays one of the following license states    a    Authorized     You are authorized to use the function    m    Not authorized     You are not authorized to use the  function  you need to get a license for the function    m    Expired     Your license was a temporary license  You  need to get a new license to use the function        License type    T
75.  the language setting in Microsoft   Internet Explorer    1  Open Microsoft   Internet Explorer    2  Select Tools menu   Internet options  The internet options window appears    3  Make sure the General tab is selected    4  Click the Languages button in the lower part of the window  Another window opens    5  Select the language of your choice  A new language can be added to the list with the Add  button     i      Move the newly added language up in the list to the top position     Click OK to confirm or Cancel to close both windows again     on      Click Refresh in the toolbar or open another page  The language of the application will  be changed     94 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set another language for the Oc   Express WebTools        i  Note     It is possible that the internet options are put under a different menu  depending on the  Microsoft   Internet Explorer version you use     How to change the language setting in Mozilla Firefox         Open Mozilla Firefox         Select the Extra menu   Options  The Options window appears      Click the Advanced button and make sure you have selected the General tab      In the Languages section click the Choose    button  Another window opens      Select the language of your choice  A new language can be added to the list with the Add  button    Move the newly added language up in the list to the top position      Click OK to confirm or Cancel to close both win
76.  the new media is ready  for use        Chapter 5   Use the printing system 157    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The output delivery       The output delivery    Introduction    There are four factors that can influence the delivery destination of the printed output     1  The media profile of the media you use   Some media profiles require a specific output delivery  If the correct media profile is available  on your printer operator panel  the Oc   ColorWave 600 automatically selects the correct  output delivery   If the correct media is not available on your printer operator panel  you can download the  media profile from the Oc   website  see    Download a media profile from the Oc   web site    on  page 286  and upload the media profile to the  Oc   PowerM controller       Oc   PowerM Plus  controller    see    Upload a media profile    on page 287     2  The media roll core size of the media you use    3  The  Delivery destination    setting that you defined in the Oc   Express WebTools   To set the default  Delivery destination    select the    Preferences       Print job defaults    tab    4  When you define print job settings in the printer drivers or the job submission tools  these  values always overrule the default values defined in the Oc   Express WebTools     158 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The output delivery    Me testreter of Pe cried ees com be Pe Tao Detvery Tey DT  or Pe brima Cnet o
77.  the printer operator   You can use the printer operator panel to define the correct  panel media type for the media that you load on your printer   For each media roll you can select one of the media types  that you enabled in the Oc   Express WebTools     in the print job submis    In your print job submission application  Oc   Windows    sion applications printer driver  Oc   Publisher Express  Oc   Publisher Select   you can select a media type and media format for your print  job  You must select a media type that is available on your  printer        280 Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Configure the media sizes       Configure the media sizes    Introduction    You must indicate in the Oc   Express WebTools the following settings   m The core size of the media rolls  m The media sizes    How to define the core size of the media    Attention   A Access the Oc   Express WebTools  This setting is editable for the Key operator and the    Power user     1  Navigate to    Configuration       Printer setup       2  Click  Edit    in the  Media  bar or click the value of the  Two inch core used    setting if  you also use 2 inch cores   The standard roll core size for the Oc   ColorWave 600 is 3 inch  If you also use media  rolls with 2 inch cores the Oc   ColorWave 600 must do some internal adjustments to  also support these media    3  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or  Cancel  to reject
78.  tray        Note   Ifyou use a folder you must set  the folder value   see    Define the    folder value    on page 40     38 Chapter 2   Get to know the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals          The finishing options       Copy delivery tray Illustration       The Copy delivery tray is a flat tray be  n    hind the printer  The Copy delivery tray  can collect a maximum of 100 prints      i  Note   The folder is not supported in  combination with the  Receiv     ing rack  basket   or folder           Chapter 2   Get to know the printing system 39    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Define the folder value       Define the folder value    Introduction    If you use a folder you must set the folder value     Attention   A Please do not change the  Configuration     Printer setup         Finishing       Model name   configType   setting  This setting is intended for service purposes only     How to define the folder value    Attention   A Access the Oc   Express WebTools  This setting is editable for the System administrator  the Power user     1  Navigate to    Configuration       Printer setup         Finishing       2  Set the value to  Estefold  if a folder is connected to the external output at the rear side  of the printer   The default folder value is  No finisher     You must only change this value if your hardware  configuration changes    3  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or    Cancel    to reject your entries     40 Chapt
79.  your entries     How to define the media sizes    Attention   A Access the Oc   Express WebTools  This setting is editable for the System Administrator  and the Power user     1  Navigate to the  Support     Media  tab    2  Click on the value of the  Supported media sizes  setting  A new window opens    3  Select the media series from the drop down list  For each of the standard media series      ANSI small      DIN    ANSI mixed  or  DIN Carto   a set of media sizes is enabled as  indicated in the table below  You can enable or disable media sizes to tune the system to  your environment  The media series will then automatically change into a  Custom  media  series     Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system 281    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Configure the media sizes             Media series Media sizes     ANSI small    42x60 inch  E  D  C  B    DIN  42x60 inch  E   Ao  B1  A1  B2  A2  A3   ANSI mixed  42x60 inch  F   E   E  D   D  C   C  B   B      DIN Carto  42x60 inch  500x700 mm  700x1000 mm  800x1189 mm  Ao   A1  A2  A3  Bo  E     Custom   Note     You cannot disable media sizes that are currently loaded on the printer     Note    When you load a media roll the printer automatically detects the roll width  If the detected  roll width is not a standard width  the printer selects the next smaller roll width that is  supported by the printer      i  Note     When you load a media roll with a size that was not yet enabled in t
80. 0           Alignment          Aligns the image on the media    see Set the    Alignment    mode    on page 331         Mirror         When  on   the image is mirrored along the vertical axis   the media transport direction          Horizontal shift        Vertical shift        Shifts the image in the horizontal direction  after alignment  to one of the positions given in  Alignment             Shifts the image in the vertical direction  after alignment  to one of positions given in  Alignment          Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 139    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the Color management settings       Set the Color management settings    Introduction    In most cases  you define the color management settings for a print job during the job  submission process  You can select the color management settings in your print job sub   mission application  Oc   Windows   printer driver  Oc   Publisher Pro or Oc   Publisher  Select  and if the Oc   Job Ticket is enabled  these settings will overrule the default settings  that you defined in the Oc   Express WebTools  Ifa file is sent to the printer without any  color management settings or if the Oc   Job Ticket is disabled  the default color manage   ment settings in the Oc   Express WebTools are used to get a good output result    The color management settings give information to the printer how the output should  be printed     You can find more detailed information about color management issues in 
81. 17   printer operator panel     sil   printing Systemi oseon 20   SENDE sripit sisii iieii 280   Systemi STATES ennei raar ESE REET PRTI 170   TONED STAES or EAEE ER 171  P  Paper sizes   Pap  r SIZES iscssssossrsvaverdeseassissseinossterssosens 125  281  Paper width detection   Paper width detection 0    125  281  Parts   Oc   Express WebTools       ccccseseseteseneneeees 88  Passwords   Oc   Express WebTools 0    cesses 114  Pause   PITIED ontrei 173  PDF processing optimization   PDF processing optimization         ccccee 324  PDF wipeout correction   PDF wipeout correction wo    325  Perceptual  photo    Perceptual  photo    ssss ssssssssesssssessresessessesseess 339  Photo   advised Settings srssnsicisanen ane 368  Photo realistic impression   Advised  settings seniorra erine 369  Point of sales graphics   advised settings occas 364  Pollution   Pollution     cc ceccececescesseesseesseeseseeeeeseees 181  184  PostScript PDF   PostScript P DE sissssesesssascsecsesstsssvsessessarsesteves 141  Power user   CESCHPUION  sssssseviiesass ieii atas 110  Preferences tab   Oc   Express WebTools     cccesseseseesereteseees 89  Preferred media types  Presentation setting   Presentation Setting 0  eeeseeeeeeees 317  Print    from the Oc   PostScript   3 Driver       TESOMUTON   lt  cove sass NaRa       SPEEA  ai sescscdiss iescssteidsaddvesesssssdesssicsdiesaizieazes    Print  copy  template    Publisher Copy sissssssvecscesscsssescostsscavasveaioss    Print cut method    Print cut m
82. 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Remove a media roll    Remove a media roll    How to remove a media roll    Attention   A Do not open the media drawer during the print process     Attention   A Do not open more than one media drawer at the same time to prevent overbalance of  the printer     Caution   A Watch your fingers when you handle the media roll     Action Illustration  Open the media drawer that   contains the media roll that you   want to remove        Roll back the media manually to  remove the media from the met   al paper guide    Then  use both hands  as indicat   ed  to lift the roll holder with the    media roll        Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system 291    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Remove a media roll    Action Illustration    Put the roll holder with the me   dia roll on the roll loading sta   tion     Pull the handle of the roll holder    locking mechanism towards you     Remove the roll holder from the  core of the media roll     Remove the media roll from the  roll loading station           292 Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Unpack the media roll          Unpack the media roll    How to unpack a media roll    Attention   A Handle the media roll with care  A dented media roll can damage the imaging devices     Attention    A Please note do
83. Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the  Oc   Print Assistant Behavior        Set the    Oc   Print Assistant Behavior     Introduction    This setting is only used when the  Print Setting    is set to  Oc   Print Assistant       The  Oc   Print Assistant    decides what print setting     Production     Production Plus         Presentation    or  Economy   must be used  based on the average toner coverage of the  print    You can use the  Oc   Print Assistant Behavior  setting to influence the average toner  coverage limits that the  Oc   Print Assistant    uses to select one of the print settings  Low  coverage area files are printed via the fast  Economy  print mode  High coverage area files  are printed via the    Presentation    mode  The thresholds for switching from one mode to  another can be altered by the  Oc   Print Assistant Behavior    In this way the  Key oper   ator    can fine tune the  Oc   Print Assistant    to optimize further speed and quality to his  personal needs  The  Oc   Print Assistant    will be the default mode for the  Oc   Color     Wave   600 Printer        1 The number in the    Oc   Print Assistant Behavior  represents a position on a scale from  o to 100  A higher number means an increased preference for print quality  a lower  number means an increased preference for print speed     Before you begin    This setting is editable for the Key operator or Power user     How to set 
84. DF file causes an internal   printer error    m Try to print it from an application using the  Oc   Windows   Printer Driver    m Ifthe error persists  contact Oc   Service     The Postscript or PDF file is complex and the   printer does not have enough memory to process   it    m Try to print it from an application using the  Oc   Windows   Printer Driver    m Ifthe error persists  contact Oc   Service         PS PDF resource or language  problem  one or more pages not  correctly printed       The Postscript or PDF file is complex or corrupt    m Try to print it from an application using the  Oc   Windows   Printer Driver    m Ifthe error persists  contact Oc   Service         No pages were generated when  processing the document          Job deleted because it is not re   coverable  data is corrupt or in   complete      The file contains some non printable pages    m The file could be corrupt    m The graphic commands in the file could be  missing     m The shift setting could be set to a value that  causes the image to move completely off the    paper        This message can appear when the printer is reboot    ed after a power failure and some documents in   the printer spool are corrupt    m Reprint the job from the submission applica   tion or from the Smart Inbox              Job deleted because it causes a  software crash in the printer          This message can appear when the printer is reboot    ed after a power failure and some documents in   the printer spool cau
85. Introduction    If you have access to an Oc   TCq scanner   the Oc   TC4 Power Logic   controller appli   cation offers the Oc   Publisher Copy option      i  Note   You need a license for the Oc   Publisher Copy option     This option allows you to send a scanned document directly to the Oc   ColorWave 600  printer   You can activate the Oc   Publisher Copy workspace from the icon in the vertical toolbar    of the Oc   TC4 Power Logic   controller application     TCy Power Logic Controller          When you activate the new Oc   Publisher Copy workspace for the first time  you must  enter the Host Name of the Oc   ColorWave 600 printer you want to connect to     230 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Introduction    TE TTTS  we          We Ke Ve  tow Ose   Prepeten     Lesinetens et ieia          On Cor uter       Publisher Copy    Normete Ge tlinetiows       Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 231    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The Oc   Publisher Copy sections    Overview of Oc   Publisher Copy    The Oc   Publisher Copy sections    TCy Power Logic Controller    Tee Dt Vow Beet Seer Lege  Meee    Bowe siete eee Q emere       Owect copy mode    dasbisd Scarred documents we aimi    a pb Fou Can pea documents and eit ting befure prerg Duti  treet    Corer  fray mene te pr adia Dy mhunter    o   Dt owiec  2    5  D  ahoia            When you access the Oc   Publisher Copy workspace  the following 
86. Maintenance   Calibrate media    Reprint the Customer Acceptance Test demo print    If the colored bars of the Customer Acceptance Test demo print still show wavy lines you  must contact the Oc   Helpdesk     378 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Thin horizontal  coloued or white lines across your print       Thin horizontal  coloued or white lines across your print    Description of the problem    Your print has one of the following problems   m Thin horizontal  colored lines in the multiple color areas  m Thin horizontal  white lines in the CMYK mono color areas     The thin lines are also visible as colored lines in RGB areas and gray areas     Cause of the problem    During a swath of the    Imaging devices     a nozzle drops out or a poor functioning nozzle  misdirects the droplets  It is possible that the system compensates for the nozzle dropout  during the next swath     Illustration        347  Thin  colored lines in the multiple color areas     Nozzle dropout                Number   Nozzle dropout  1   Magenta   2 Cyan   3 Black          Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 379    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Thin horizontal  coloued or white lines across your print       4 Yellow       How to solve the problem    1   2     Ja    Check if the system compensates for the nozzle dropout during the next swath    If the system does not compensate for the nozzle dropout  you must 
87. Oc      ColorWave    600       Ride the wave of color       Canon    CANON GROUF       User manual  Operating  information       Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Copyright       2011 Oc    All rights reserved  No part of this work may be reproduced  copied  adapted  or transmitted  in any form or by any means without written permission from Oc       Oc   makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifi   cally disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose   Further  Oc   reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time  to time in the content hereof without obligation to notify any person of such revision or  changes     Edition  2011 05    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Trademarks       Trademarks    Oc    Oc   ColorWave 600  Oc   Express WebTools are registered trademarks of Oc     Adobe   and PostScript   3    are registered trademarks of Adobe   Systems Incorporated   Macintosh   is a registered trademark of Apple   Computer  Inc    Microsoft    Windows    Windows 7    Windows Server   2003  Windows XP    Internet  Explorer   and Windows Vista   are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Mi   crosoft   Corporation in the United States and or other countries    AutoCAD   is a registered trademark of Autodesk  Inc     Citrix   MetaFrame    and Presentation Server     are registered trademarks of Citrix Sys   tems  Inc    Novell   is 
88. Run the installation wizard        cccccecsesseeeeees 55    S  Safety approvals   Safety approvals sssisscssssiisssssasistississiosicssisisai 403  Saturation  business graphics    Saturation  business graphics  wee 340  Save   LiGENSES  isseire igana       settings in a file    Scale       Seale seessesedscvsesseciyei am a ne 138  Scale Factor   Sale Ficob nanenane nnan 268  Scan destination   Publisher Copy serarecensensndieaa 250  Scan template   Publisher Copy    s  isccsecoresssorscesssesetscsessoceetseters 251  Screen   COMMPULALOD sessist sessassessscssencesssecsesessccssesoasecs 34   OMe eeciaiissasattasai tie AAE A ES 34   MAINTENANCE    eceeceseesseseessessesseseessesseseseceaeenees 34   queue   Smart inbox    cccccccsssesccsscesscessesssceseessscssesessees 34   SLOE e o EEEE SE A T  34  Scroll wheel       Scroll wheel scsssssdsicsssssserscsssssessosseassissessesvdsscesay 31  Second language   Second language wo    83  119  Serial number   Serial number esedssisc castes cescseseih exh catsipsasscstaeacesae 55  Set   color management settings          cccseeeeeeees 140   COLO Oe sasedisesesdssssssssnssesvensesevesisssasessodenses 316   network duplex mode      cceeeseeeseteeeeeteeeees 128   MEtWORK speed x cessadesssnsssessardabesincadcecdesssseniees 129  Set the print setting   Set the print setting ssrin 320  Settings   CHANGE  E T  96   OVERVIEW  lscslostesicesanssivesenessstooendssbevesesstieo esaeabs 280   view and CHECK sccssesiesteccssssscossecesesessseoscescse
89. Setting     see    Set the Print Setting       on page 317       Production Plus  setting  see    Set the    Production Plus    setting    on page 321    Economy monochrome enhanced setting  see Set the    Economy monochrome enhanced   setting    on page 322     Settings in settings group    Preferences      Print job defaults       Postscript PDF  rasterization settings        PDF processing optimization    setting  see Set the  PDF processing optimization       on  page 324      PDF wipeout correction    setting  see Set the PDF wipeout correction    on page 325        Settings in settings group    Preferences         Print job defaults         Color management  settings for HP GL  HP GL 2 and HP RTL files     Settings in settings group    Preferences         Print job defaults         Color management    settings for TIFF and JPEG files     Settings in settings group    Preferences         Print job defaults         Color management  settings for PostScript and PDF files             Color feel    setting  see    What is Color feel     on page 336          Note   You can define the default color management settings for different file types     Settings in settings group    Configuration       Printer setup         Printer languages          Long plot mode  setting  see Set the    Long plot mode    on page 326           312 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Main settings that influence the print quality       No
90. TISES  25 35 Ssh EE EEA  the settings in the Oc   Express WebTools    Check and clean    guide apinaa u nE E R    Print surbace isssscsissssissassasssssssisssssssssssnssteciiens    Check print quality    Check print quality oo  375  377 379    Clean card    Clean Card sis sentdceverssieststilidarcastsicaes 181  184    Clear the system    Clear the system rinne anena    CMY in grayscale economy prints    SOULE E E oa    CMYK    color space definition    s  sssssssssessssessesseseeesee  IAP ULE LALA EEN INE    Collate    Color banding    Color banding isisisi    Color feel    Color feel  ieccceecccesccsscccssesessesesssseessese 140  271    definition serens drsne iieis ne        Oc   enhanced colors     c csessessessessesseseeseeseees    Color management    definition screenie anna    Color management settings    defaults sereme nar A EN 349 353  job submission   ss sssssssssssssssssssssssessessesreeseesess  OVELVICW nssssssssssssssesssessseessesssesseessreeseess 140  344  predefined eren a K ENR    priorities    Color mode    Color mode  o  ceeceesccessesesseceesees 136  271  316    Concept    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals                   default settings isisisi sin iieri 118  Jobs Queue             Smart Inbox  Configuration  energy save MOES smniiiinaiiii 123  network settings   e s sessessesresseesesresresreeresseeee 132  network settings in the Oc   Express WebTools  E E EEEE ETET 127  Configuration tab  Oc   Express WebTools     s sssssssssssesssesiesresee
91. Web coat       Absolute colorimet   ed  SWOP   ric      a  US Web un       Relative colorimet   coated    ric        Simulated Oc   TCS400 CAD colors                Simulated non Oc   printer  vivid colors          Simulated non Oc   printer  match screen colors                   Simulated non Oc   printer  no color correction                      None  managed by application         The output quality ofa simulated non Oc   printer setting depends on the selected input  profile for simulated printers  Make sure you use the correct input profile for simulated  printers     Oc   ColorWave 600 path  Support   Input profiles     352 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Color management settings for PostScript and PDF files   CMYK input         Color management settings for PostScript and PDF files    CMYK input     The default settings are emphasized     Input profile Color Management settings    Input da    Standardization    Color feel    Rendering intent  ta    RGB m  sRGB     Oc   CAD colours     m  AdobeRGB        Euroscale    Oc   enhanced colors     Perceptual  pho   coated  to        Euroscale un   Saturation  business  coated  graphics       a  US Web coat     Absolute colorimet   ed  SWOP   ric      a    US Web un     Relative colorimet   coated ric        Simulated Oc   TCS400 CAD colors        Simulated non Oc   printer  vivid colors         Simulated non Oc   printer  match screen colors       Simulated
92. a registered trademark of Novell  Inc    Mozilla Firefox    is a registered trademark of The Mozilla Foundation     Pentium      is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation   Energy STAR   is a registered trademark of the U S  Environmental Protection Agency     EPA      Products in this publication are referred to by their general trade names  In most  if not  all cases  these designations are claimed as trademarks or registered trademarks of their  respective companies     Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Contents       Contents       Chapter 1  INCFOGUCTION ese ccecc tec cece icine ieeeeteas eee eee nea 11  Notes for the r ader               ccsssscssscecceeceeeceeeeeceeeeseesseeseeeeanaeeeeseeseeeeeeeees 12  Available COCUMENtATION          cccccccccceeceeeeseeesseeesecenecneeeeauseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 14  HOW tO USE this MANUAL            cccccesssccsteeeeceeeeeceeeeeseeseseesssseesesneanseeeeseeess 17  Chapter 2  Get to know the printing SySteM               cc csssssseeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeesenaeaaaes 19  The Oc   ColorWave 600 printing SYSteM                cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 20  The Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system consumable6s               2  22  The Oc   ColorWave 600 printelr             cccssssssessssssssecsseceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 23  Printer working area  FOOtprint             cccccccseecesseeceseeseeeeeseeeeseeeeseeess 23  The printer hardware components  front                 ssssssesssseeeeeeeeeees 24  The printer h
93. a type  and a media size  the printer automatically selects the roll that contains the required  media type and size     Before you begin    This setting is editable for the Key operator or Power user     How to set the    Automatic roll switch       1  Click  Preferences       System properties       2  Click  Edit  in the  Printer properties    bar or click the value of the  Automatic roll switch     setting    3  Select the correct value   Select  Enabled  if print productivity is an important factor    4  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or  Cancel  to reject your entries     Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 327    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the  Spool threshold          Set the    Spool threshold       Introduction    When the job memory is full the printer can not receive new jobs  You can tune the     Spool threshold    to define the spool capacity for specific job types  Allow a higher capac   ity for small jobs if you select Low  Select High if you want to reduce the risk of aborting  file transfer of large print jobs if the job memory is full     You can choose one of following values   a    Low     Select this value if you want to allow a higher capacity for small print jobs   m    Normal     This is the default setting   m  High   Select this value if you want to reduce the risk of aborting file transfer of large print  jobs if the job memory is full     Before you begin    This setting is editable for the Key operator or P
94. ace the maintenance tray           cccccceceesceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 165   Monitor the Primter         cccccccccccccceeceeesssessseeesssseanseeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeess 168   The system monitor and the system States            cccceeseeeeeeees 168   Control the Printer             ccccsscssscccsceeceeceeeeeeeeessseesseseseseeesseneeaeeeeeeeees 172   Switch on or switch off the printer           ccccccccceceeeseeesssseeessereees 172   Pause OF resume the printer          cccccccceeeeeeessesesssesesssneeaneeeeneeees 173   Solve problems with the Printer            cccccccesceessssssssesesssneeaneeeeneees 174   IAEFOGUCTION ses cisdadsdesssensecctactunezesidends cadens tedhansaeaas cdviedwiedecsecsenaduareye 174   Cover or door OPENed       cccccceesscesseesessencanseeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 175   Pull up the  Top delivery tray    and open the  Top cover           178   Close the  Top cover  and flap back the  Top delivery tray       180   Check and clean the print SUrfACE            ccccccccceceeeeeeeesseeessenneees 181   Check and clean the guide flap                ccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 184   Adjust the  Top delivery tray                  c cssscssssssssseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 187   C  tthe meddid  masno e ti tasieessadeavesctedeseddeliaeatetadaevesansecdudasts 190   Create print   ODSecsssssesecscntenedentates acarician inanan inan aaia inania aaa aa 191   Create  manage and print jJODS          ccccccccccceeseeesseesesseessseeenseeeaeeees 191   Set UP
95. actually  only   default  loaded on the printer                 When the media is not available     Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the default behaviour for the media selection       m In the  Select any enabled media    mode  the system can select a media that is not  loaded   When a submitted job requires an unloaded media  the job status turns into    Waiting         Media not currently loaded on the printer    and the job is held until you load the  needed media    m In the    Select loaded media only    mode the system can select a media from an empty  roll   When a submitted job requires a media from an  temporary  empty roll  the status of  the job turns into Waiting        Media not currently loaded on the printer    and the job  is held until you load the needed media     Note    Li  When the media is unavailable and the job is in  Waiting  status  the name of one  missing media is displayed in a tooltip  Position the mouse over the job to display the  tooltip     Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 241    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Enable or disable    Direct copy mode       Enable or disable    Direct copy mode     Introduction    You can enable or disable the    Direct copy mode  by clicking the  Direct copy mode   button in the Oc   Publisher Copy default settings section  upper right corner      Illustration    TCy Power      Boer siet ome Dormer GP en hetero     Cwect cop
96. aeeaeeeeeeeeas 262   Advanced       Media    SettingS               cccceceesceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaees 265   Advanced       Layout    SettingS             cccccescsesceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 268   Advanced     Rendering  S ttingS              c cscceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaees 271   Advanced       Finishing    SettingS             cccccscceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaees 274  FOIA      JOD Pe a E E TTT 276   Chapter 7  Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system                0008 279  Overview of the media related SettingS               ccececcceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 280  Configure the media SIZCS             ccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeenaeaeeeeeens 281  What is a media Profile             ccccccccceeeceessseeeeseeeessneeaueeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseess 283  Manage the media profiles                ccccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeas 284  Download a media profile from the Oc   web Site             ccccceeeeseeeeeees 286  Upload a media profile             cssccsssccccceeceeceeeeeeceesseeeseeeeseseenaneeeeaueeeeeeees 287  Replace a media roll          ccccsscsssssessscecceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeseeeseeeeeseescsneeanseeeeeeees 289  The   Media Craw r iiciin nnna aeaa ariana Eai aieiai 289  Remove a media FOll        cccccccceceeeeseeesseesseeensesneeaueeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseess 291  Unpack the media roll        ccccccccccessecesseeeeseenccseeeaneeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeessseess 293  Load a Meda  Tollurin naaa Eia 295  Define the media type and the cor
97. ality and Print productivity 343    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Color management settings in the Oc   Express WebTools       Color management settings in the Oc   Express WebTools    Depending on the type of file you want to print  the Oc   ColorWave 600 offers different  color information conversions  You can select the color management settings  that give   the best results for the color information conversion    Open the  Preferences     Print job defaults    tab to define the default color management  settings per file type     Color management settings for HP GL  HP GL 2 and HP RTL   files    Color management settings for TIFF and JPEG files  or    Color management settings  for PostScript and PDF files        The Oc   Windows   Printer Driver and the Oc   Publisher Select job submission applica   tion offer the same color management settings  but now file type independent      i  Note   It is only important to know what the file type of your print job is  if you want to use  or must use the color management settings defined in the Oc   Express WebTools  If  you define the color management settings in your Oc   Windows   Printer Driver or the  Oc   Publisher Select job submission application  the color management settings are au   tomatically assigned to the correct file type  the color management settings defined in  the Oc   Express WebTools are overruled      344 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com M
98. allation and do not  need frequent adjustment        Configuration         Overview       Summary of the settings organised in different groups   m    Connectivity     m    Printer setup             Support    tab    Editable for System administrator and Power user   see    User roles and authorizations    on  page 110     90 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Purpose of the Oc   Express WebTools       The  Support  tab contains the tasks that involve contact with Oc   or reseller     Tab       Support    About     m Information about the Oc   ColorWave 600 system  software version   View Total Area Click counter   The Total Area Click or  TAC     is a click that is a func   tion of print volume  square meter  and of toner cover   age  grams  square meter            Counter history     m Overview of the consumables used per printed job         Media   m Configure the media series   m Overview of the media profiles active on the system     m Management of media profiles         Update    m Information about the current Oc   ColorWave 600  system software version    m Update the system software         Licenses      License details     Information to order a new license    Installation of a new license           System  tab    Accessible for any user   Open the  System  tab to get an overview of the current status of the printing system     The toner status    The available media on the printer    The system status  for ex
99. always overrule the default values defined in the Oc   Express WebTools     Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system 303    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The output delivery                     Te testreter of Pe prind wees con be Pe Tho Detvery Tey  DT  y Pe brima Oat of Pe bet of Pe  pee Se eth 0 et eet fe Pe etree of Cree tet Ih cane a Sete    ened  amp  he ore    p Deini tap Daey Der CDT   Dedvery destmution    Top Detvery Troy  TOT     Doema cutpet  hack           iwa  on                      E Nga Tan _US pratat rotete  saha ato mede sang    l    E I I  ones Tont     _   1  The output delivery    Attention    A The following table gives an overview of the common output delivery destination  If the  media profile of the media you use requires a specific output delivery  the common delivery  destination will be overruled     304 Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The output delivery    When the   and the default Then the printed output  media roll      Delivery destina    you use tion    is   has a    3  roll  Top Delivery Tray   is delivered at the  Top Delivery Tray  TDT    core  TDT         3  roll  External output is lead through the slot below the  Top back cover   core  back   at the back of the printer        2  roll Ignored  core          Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system 305    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter c
100. ample  Printer paused      Ready to print         Sleeping        The active job     Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 91    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The system requirements       The system requirements    Introduction    You can use an Internet browser to open the home page of the Oc   Express WebTools   Depending on the Internet browser you use  you must set the required minimum  browser security settings as indicated below     Note   Li  The minimum system requirements are a 3 GHz Pentium 4 with 1 Gbyte RAM and  Windows XP     Set the minimum browser security settings for Internet Explorer 6    Attention   A You must enable cookies          Action       Select Tools   Internet Options   Security   Local intranet   Custom Level       ActiveX controls and plug ins                  Enable  Enable       Run ActiveX controls and plugins       Script ActiveX controls marked safe for scripting  Downloads   File download   Enable                  Miscellaneous    Allow META REFRESH    Scripting    Active scripting          Enable       92 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The system requirements       Set the minimum browser security settings for Internet Explorer 7   8    Attention   A You must enable cookies     Step   Action   Value    Select Tools   Internet Options   Security   Local intranet   Custom Level  2 ActiveX controls and plug ins  m Binary and script behaviors Enable  3 Downloads 
101. anel dis   plays a request when you must  load or replace a toner cartridge     Feola megenta car trioga       Unpack the toner cartridge     Note    Please do not throw  away the empty packag   ing of the new toner  cartridge  This packag   ing is used as mainte   nance tray     Remove the empty toner car   tridge        Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started 65    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load or replace a toner cartridge    Illustration    Place the new toner cartridge      i  Note    You must place the ton   er cartridge in the cor   rect color position  The  toner cartridges have  fixed positions     When the new toner cartridge is  placed correctly  the following  message is displayed on the  printer operator panel     Replace the maintenance tray   Use the packaging of the new  toner cartridge        Baplace the mertenacce toy Use  Me Pach Ogi Of the new toner  crrege    Prope Meot to start    Follow the instructions in the  wizard   see    Replace the mainte   nance tray    on page 67              66 Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Replace the maintenance tray    Replace the maintenance tray    Illustration    Nr Component Description   Function  7  Maintenance tray  drawer       How to replace the maintenance tray       Action Illustration    The printer operator panel dis   plays a request when you must  replace the maintenance tray  tape
102. ant    if you do not  care where your legend is after folding or if you  want to fold a drawing without a legend    m load a larger media size if the rotated drawing  fits into the maximum foldable media width   check the finisher specifications         Event messages       Event message Troubleshoot          Print settings conflict  the docu    The print job contains a non supported structure  ment is identified and printed   of embedded Oc   Job Tickets  The settings you  with the settings embedded in    have selected in the submission application are not  the file    used  Instead  the Oc   Job Ticket settings embed   ded in the file are used for printing and identifica   tion of the job  The job will appear in the print  queue and the Smart Inbox with its original name   m Ifthe settings embedded in the file contain a  Smart Inbox name  the job will be kept in that  Smart Inbox    m Ifthe settings embedded in the file do not  contain a Smart Inbox name  the job will be  kept in the default Smart Inbox defined in the     System properties         Ifyou do not want to use the original settings  embedded in the file  use Oc   Publisher Select  to print the job              Chapter 5   Use the printing system 227    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Event messages       228 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Chapter 6  The Oc   Publisher Copy  option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Introduction    
103. anuals    Color management settings and job submission       Color management settings and job submission    The way in which you submit a print job to the printer defines in most cases the file type  of the document  If you use a printer driver  the original file type will be changed by the  driver into a standard file type  The printer checks the file type of the document and  based on the file type the printer applies the default colour management settings of the  Oc   Express WebTools     If you use FTP or LPR to send a job to the printer  the file type is not changed  The file  is sent to the printer the way in which it was saved in the application you used to create  or edit the file  If there is no embedded color profile present in the document  the printer  checks the file type of the document and based on the file type the printer applies the  default color management settings of the Oc   Express WebTools    If you want to use the embedded color profile for your print job  for example  embedded  profile created with Adobe   Illustrator  you can choose between 2 options  You can use  the WPD driver where you can indicate to follow the color settings managed by the ap   plication  You can also send the job via FTP or LPR  If the controller can recognize the  embedded color profile  it will be applied  If the embedded color profile cannot be recog   nized  the controller applies the default color settings managed by the Oc   Express  WebTools     The table below gives a
104. anualsPrinter com Manuals    Fold a job       The system displays a warning message but allows printing when     m The selected media and print settings do not allow the delivery of the folded output  with the legend on top of the folded packet     The legend will not be on top of the  folded packet      m The application could not find the legend     Automatic detection of the legend      No  legend in file    or  Timeout        Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 277    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Fold a job       278 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc    ColorWave 600 printing  system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Overview of the media related settings       Overview of the media related settings    Introduction    It is important to make sure that the media related settings of your system are set to  generate an optimal print result     You can set media related settings in the following places     Media related settings   Description    in the Oc   Express The Oc   Express WebTools allow you to manage the media  WebTools profiles on the printer    In the  Support     Media  tab you can download new media  profiles  upload media profiles to the  Oc   PowerM con   troller         Oc   PowerM Plus controller   and enable the  media that must be available on your printer operator  panel     see Manage the media profiles    on page 284     on
105. aper Uncoated 60 70 Paper Uncoated 60 70  Top delivery tray   P 8 P 8 P ry tray    Paper Uncoated 70 85g Paper Uncoated 70 85g  Top delivery tray     Paper Uncoated 85 120g   Paper Uncoated 85 120    Top delivery tray          Paper Uncoated 120 160g   Paper Uncoated 120 160g      External output     back    Generic Bond Bond 2olb  Top delivery tray       Media types   Films          Description g m     mil   Name on the Printer oper    Output delivery  or mu ator panel    Film 3 3 5 mil o Film 3 3 5 mil  Top delivery tray     Film 4 mil Film 4 mil  External output     back      Generic Translu  Translucent 181b  Top delivery tray   cent       Generic Vellum Vellum 20lb  Top delivery tray           Appendix A   Specifications of the Oc   ColorWave 600 413    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Support for non Oc   media types and sizes       Note    Li  The media profiles for non Oc   media types are generic media profiles that give the best  possible result for a variety of the specified non Oc   media types  Because the media  profiles for Oc   media types are fine tuned for each specific media type  the quality of  the printed output will improve if you use Oc   media types     Media sizes  Minimum    Media width 42 inch 297 millimeters  11 inch       Roll length 200 meters Not applicable       414 Appendix A   Specifications of the Oc   ColorWave 600    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Specifications drivers and job submission software       Specifi
106. ard embedded controller   or   m the    Oc   PowerM Plus controller       high end embedded controller         Back left cover       26 Chapter 2   Get to know the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       The printer hardware components  back     Nr   Component Description   Function     Ventilation cover    Covers the  Oc   PowerM controller       Oc    PowerM Plus controller       Top back cover  Used for error recovery             9     i  Note   It is possible to install an optional   Receiving rack  basket   or a folder      i  Note   If you select  External output  back    the printed output is lead through the  slot below the  Top back cover            Top back right cover     B     Back right cover     13    Right cover of the media  drawer          Chapter 2   Get to know the printing system 27    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The    Media drawer       The  Media drawer       Illustration       Component   function table    Attention   A Only use intact media rolls  Dented media rolls can damage the  Imaging devices        Nr Component Description   Function    Media roll 3 or 5 in other media drawers    Media roll 4 or 6 in other media drawers     Roll holder  Carries the media roll       28 Chapter 2   Get to know the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The  Media drawer          Nr Component Description   Function     Roll loading station    Groove integrated behind the front cover of  the med
107. ardware components  back                 sssssssssssesnseeeeeees 26  The     Media Grawe i     icisiiisisevcosseasieceies 30506 tenctearaneacisdesedeaucnavcdesceweeees 28  The  Imaging SCCTION 2    eeeecetceeeeeeeeeeeee ee eeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeees 30  The printer Operator Panel    cece ceccce cee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseseaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 31  The hardware of the Printer operator Panel               sssssssssssseeeeeees 31  The main screens on the printer operator Ppanell           cccsceceeeees 34  atiati are Peen E E T E 37  The finishing Optio NS sidans ananena aaea da niina ied aee 37  Define the folder ValUe        cccccccccceeceeesseeesseeessenneaneeeeaneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 40  Set the  Oc   Finishing Assistant               ssssseessssseeneessennnnssrernnnnnnernnn nn 41  Chapter 3  Prepare the printing system for use and get started              cccccsssssesseeeeees 43  IAEFOCUCHI ON atic tdewes ceaistsveenetentineedZcecededestadsascevedvothy diada aaa Naa aea aia 44  How to move the Oc   ColorWave 600              ccccessceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeees 45  Connect the Oc   ColorWave 600 printel            ccccccceeseeesesessesensesnteaeeeees 50  How to connect the network Cable          ccccssccssscccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeseees 50  How to connect the mains supply Cablle                  cccscseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 52  How to switch on the printer              ceeecceceeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeees 53  The installation PrOC Cure         ccccccccc
108. as    canceled    in the  History  section   The submission of the documents to the printer is stopped     canceling  status   The job  is displayed with the  canceled  status in the  History  view     Reprint a job  1  Select the job in the    Active jobs  or  History  section   2  Click  Reprint       The job is submitted to the printer  enter the accouting information if requested   It ap   pears in the    Active jobs  view     248 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Track and manage a submitted job       View the settings    1  Select the job in the  Active jobs  or  History  section   2  Click    Properties      In the  Job Properties    window you can check and view the documents that compose the    job   Remove one or several jobs from the    History       Note   Li  Only the jobs submitted by a user during the running session are displayed in the  Jobs   window  Therefore the user can cancel and remove only the jobs he submitted     1  In the  History  section  select the job or the jobs to be removed from the list   2  Click  Remove      Note   Li  To remove all the jobs from the    History     click    Clear History        Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 249    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    New scan destination    Copy settings related to the scanner    New scan destination    Introduction    Oc   Publisher Copy adds a new default scan destination on your controller  called Pub   lish
109. ation    tab or the  Preferences  tab    2  Click    Restore defaults    in the top right hand corner of the screen  A secondary window  is opened    3  Click  Ok  to restore the factory default settings or    Cancel    to close the window without  restoring the factory defaults     Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 101    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Update the Oc   ColorWave 600 software       Update the Oc   ColorWave 600 software    Introduction    If you receive software update CD s you can follow the procedure below to update the  Oc   ColorWave 600 software     Attention   A Copy the update package from the CD s to the PC that you use to update the software   Do not try to update the software directly from the CD      i  Note   The software update procedure can take quite some time     How to update the Oc   ColorWave 600 software    1  Open a web browser on a workstation connected to the network    2  Enter the address   http    lt Oc   Productname address gt    for example  http   134 188 26 173  or    http    lt Oc   Productname Hostname gt    for example  http   OceColorWave6ooPosterPrinter or http   OceColorWave6oo  to access the Oc    Express WebTools    3  Click on the  Support     Update  tab in the Oc   Express WebTools and log in as a System  Administrator  the default password is  SysAdm      When you have logged in correctly  this tab gives you information about your current  software version and the installation date of this softwa
110. ault value defined for this type    of file        Quality       Select the  Quality  level to be applied      Economy      Production     1 A 1  Presentation          to reduce the amount of toner used and produce lighter  images with less details     for high productivity of good quality prints     to create rich  detailed images but with a reduced pro   ductivity        272 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Advanced       Rendering    settings          Oc   Print Assistant    to select the best print setting for each document  based    on the graphical content  It is configured on the    printer        Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 273    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Advanced       Finishing  settings        Advanced    Finishing  settings    Introduction    The    Finishing    options displayed depend on the printer available options        Additional strips       Depending on printer capabilities  you can add a    Leading strip     a    Trailing strip     or a     Binding strip    to correct the length of the output  The adjustment of the edges changes  the output format    The    Leading strip  adds a strip at the top of the printout  o to 400 mm   o to 15 74 in    The    Trailing strip    adds a strip at the bottom of the printout  o to 400 mm   0 to 15 74  in      The    Binding strip    is an additional strip set to punch holes or to create tabs on a folded  printout     Not
111. b  site you need to upload this media profile to the Oc   ColorWave 600 embedded controller     Before you begin    This setting is editable for the System administrator or Power user     How to install a new media profile     Click  Support     Media         Click the    Install    button in the toolbar above the media profiles list      Click Browse to navigate to the correct file on your workstation      Select the media profile and click Upload or  Cancel         Click the check box of the new media profile and click the  Enable    button in the toolbar  above the media profiles list to make the new media profile available on the printer oper   ator panel     a ph WB LN m    How to update an existing media profile     Click  Support     Media         Click the check box of the media profile you want to update      Click the    Install    button in the toolbar above the media profiles list      Click Browse to navigate to the correct file on your workstation      Select the media profile and click Upload or  Cancel         Click the check box of the updated media profile and click the  Enable    button in the  toolbar above the media profiles list to make the updated media profile available on the    an fw PY    printer operator panel     Result    A warning message appears to inform you of the consequences for the print jobs  The file  is stored on the Oc   ColorWave 600 embedded controller  The new file is visible in the  media profile list on the  Media  tab     Chapter
112. b from the Job Queue select the job and click    Delete         Delete all     To empty the Job Queue completely click the  Delete all    button     Note   Li  The icon in front of the job name provides status information about the job  Detailed  information about the status is displayed in the tooltip      i  Note     When a job is printed  the job is removed from the Job Queue     196 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Use Smart Inboxes in a multiple user environment       Use Smart Inboxes in a multiple user environment    Introduction    A multiple user environment is a working environment where users directly send jobs to  the printer and collect their own prints  In this environment it is important for a user to  have easy access to his personal jobs     Illustration    Ira  ing    l       How to set up the Smart Inboxes in a multiple user environment    1  Open the  Preferences     System properties    tab en select  Edit  in the  Job management   bar     2  Enter the following values  example      Setting     Restrict remote actions on jobs to the  operator          Display a view on all Smart Inbox jobs      Keep completed jobs in the Smart Inbox            Expiration time out for Smart Inbox For example  8 hours  jobs        Chapter 5   Use the printing system 197    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Use Smart Inboxes in a repro environment       Use Smart Inboxes in a repro environment    Introduction   
113. cations drivers and job submission software    Oc   drivers    Software environment   Required driver Remarks    All Windows applica    Oc   Windows   Printer   This driver is a mixed raster vec   tions  for example  Au    Driver tor HP GL 2z printer driver that    toCAD   2000 family  allows you to print from any ap   plication under Windows    2000    Windows XP    Win   dows Vista   or Windows Serv   er   2003 to your Oc   printer     Graphical application   Oc   PostScript   3    The drivers allow you to print  software Drivers from a Windows 2000    Win   dows XP    Macintosh MacOS  8 6 9 x or Macintosh Mac OS  X application to Oc   printers            i  Note   Visit Oc   on the Internet at www oce com for the latest information     Optional application software    Function   Application software    Job submission m Oc   Repro Desk    a Oc   Onyx RIP       Appendix A   Specifications of the Oc   ColorWave 600 415    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Specifications drivers and job submission software          416 Appendix A   Specifications of the Oc   ColorWave 600    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Appendix B  Reader s comment sheet    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Reader s comment sheet       Reader s comment sheet    Questions    Have you found this manual to be accurate   O Yes  O No    Were you able to operate the product  after reading this manual   O Yes  O No    Does this manual provide sufficient background information 
114. cececesseeeeseesseeeneeeeeaueeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 54  INtFOCUCTION           ccssccscceceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeessseesuaueeeanseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseessees 54  Run the installation wizard from the printer operator panel           55  Configure the network settings MANUAIIY            cccssseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 61  Load or replace a toner CartridGe            cccccceeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeees 64  Replace the maintenance tray            ceccsccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeees 67  Load a media FOll           ceccssessssseenenneceneeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeesseessseeesceneeeauseeeceeeeeess 70  The  Media Arawe r         ccccccceesceesesseeesnnsnsneeauseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseseseseees 70  4    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Contents       Unpack a media roll        ceeeccccceeceeesceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeegeaeeeeeeeeeeas 72  Load a media FOll      eessssceeceeeeeceeeceeceesseeesscesseenneaueeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeess 74  Complete the printer configuration in the Oc   Express WebTools     80  Configure the regional settings of the Oc   ColorWave 600                  83  Print the Customer Analysis Tool  CAT  demo print               eceeeeee 84  Chapter 4  Configure the printing Syste m                   ccs  cceeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeed 87  Introduction to the Oc   Express WebDTOOIS                  sssssssseessseeeeeeeeeees 88  Purpose of the Oc   Express WebDTOOIS           cccccccsccsssssseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 88  The syste
115. cense is needed to activate certain functions  on your Oc   ColorWave 600     You can use the  Support     Licenses  tab to perform the following tasks   m View the current active licenses   m Get the host id of the Oc   system   m Save the active licenses   m Perform a license activation job   You can activate new licenses or saved licenses     License information overview    Click  Support     Licenses  to view the available licenses     You can view the license information for the following purposes   m Check the active licenses on license state  license type and license duration   m Check how long a demo license is valid   m View all options available for your Oc   system   The list of options depends on the type and version of the Oc   system   m Make a list of new options you need   m Make a list of license numbers                   Information Description       This field displays the name of the option   For Oc   ColorWave 600 the following licenses are available   m Oc   ColorWave 600 license   m Oc   Account Logic     Adobe   PostScript     3   PDF     Adobe   Simplified Chinese PostScript       Adobe   Traditional Chinese PostScript       Adobe   Japanese PostScript     Adobe   Korean PostScript               394 Chapter 9   License management    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Check your licenses    Information Description    State    This field displays one of the following license states      Authorized     You are authorized to use the function   
116. cess  is completed    5  Restart the system to activate the changes     108 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Install a new license       Result    m Ifyou have updated an expired license  the new license file overwrites the previous li   cense file    m Ifyou have uploaded a new license  the license state in the overview is changed from   Not authorized    to    Authorized        mSave the currently active licenses  on page 396    Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 109    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    User roles and authorizations       Security    Access and passwords  User roles and authorizations    Introduction    The settings in the Oc   Express WebTools can be configured and managed to enable the  optimal performance of the Oc   ColorWave 600    You can view all the settings in the Oc   Express WebTools but when you want to edit a  setting  a message appears  This message indicates that the setting is password protected   You must log in  before you have the rights and authorizations to change a setting  Logging  in requires a password     Attention   A Handle all passwords securely and with care  The machine has to be reinstalled in case  of forgotten passwords     Overview of user roles and authorizations    The table below displays the different user roles and the authorizations that belong to the    role                         User role Description    Besides the normal use of the syst
117. correct media profile to the Oc   ColorWave 600 embedded controller   see  Upload a media profile    on page 287   3  Click the check box of a media profile and click the  Enable    button in the toolbar above  the media profiles list to make the media profile available on the printer operator panel     Note    Li  You cannot restart the Oc   ColorWave 600 controller  You can only switch off and on  the Oc   ColorWave 600 printer  The media list on the printer operator panel will be  updated automatically     Chapter 5   Use the printing system 161    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load or replace a toner cartridge    Load or replace a toner cartridge    Illustration                  N Component Description   Function  9    9  Toner cartridge     cyan     r  10  Toner cartridge   yel   low     11 B  Toner cartridge      black     Toner cassette for cyan  Oc   TonerPearls               Toner cassette for yellow  Oc   TonerPearls          Toner cassette for black  Oc   TonerPearls              Toner cartridge     ma    Toner cassette for magenta  Oc   TonerPearls     genta        162 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load or replace a toner cartridge    How to load or replace a toner cartridge    Action Illustration    The printer operator panel dis     plays a request when you must  load or replace a toner cartridge     Feola megenta car trioga       Unpack the toner cartridge      i  Note   Please do not throw 
118. croll wheel    to select  Demo print    and con     firm with the  Confirmation key   above the    Scroll  wheel               84 Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Print the Customer Analysis Tool  CAT  demo print       Illustration    Use the    Scroll wheel    to select  Customer Analysis  Tool        Press  Finish  to print the    Customer Analysis Tool   demo print     f erage tit    i anaray rege  Qoe Pro  at tion Mote  Demogr tt Presentation Node       Quadty Reference Chart    Select  Back  and  Home  to return to the  Home   screen        Result    Evaluate the  Customer Analysis Tool    demo print  Check if the print does not show any  of the following output quality problems          Banding across the print with differences in color and gloss    on page 375  m    Horizontal  wavy lines across your print    on page 377  m    Thin horizontal  coloued or white lines across your print    on page 379    If no output quality problems occur  the installation procedure is finished  Your Oc    ColorWave 600 is now ready for use     Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started 85    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Print the Customer Analysis Tool  CAT  demo print       86 Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Chapter 4  Configure the printing  system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Man
119. ctayeye ma now toner    cortrage  Prope Maret w start       Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started 67    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Replace the maintenance tray    Illustration    Follow the instructions in the  wizard     Note    Please note that the   Maintenance tray  drawer    is located at the  rear side of the Oc    ColorWave 600 printer   Push the    Maintenance  tray drawer    to open it     Pull the  Maintenance tray  drawer    open        Lift the old maintenance tray  out                 68 Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Illustration    Place the empty maintenance  tray     Push the  Maintenance tray  drawer    shut     When the new maintenance tray  is placed correctly  press  Finish   on the  Printer operator panel    Minbar meh ag anina    Mabe pre te clone the erawer      Press Fon to conte  to continue        Replace the maintenance tray    Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started 69    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The    Media drawer       Load a media roll    The  Media drawer       Illustration       Component   function table       Attention   A Only use intact media rolls  Dented media rolls can damage the  Imaging devices        Nr Component Description   Function    Media roll 3 or 5 in other media drawers       Media roll 4 or 6 in other media drawers    3    Roll holder    Carries the med
120. ction  Oc   provides the Oc   Windows   Printer Driver that allows you to send print jobs to  your Oc   ColorWave 600  This driver is a mixed raster vector HP GL 2 printer driver  that allows you to print from any application under Windows 7  Windows XP    Windows  Vista    Windows Server   2003  Windows Server   2008  Windows Terminal Server       Novell 6 x  Citrix Presentation Server 4 x or Citrix XenApp to your Oc   printer                 Illustration  J Oce ColerWare 800 Printing Preferences X   Pere Lsa mep famteg Uie  Pretererces   Support  Veter rte otee Page tre an    appir moms  uD 134 188 29 G Renty Cre AD pa ta  139 mem   em ore  C    ene    Peter  Oto Al ad mem Landecage       Pt eee  Ore Pant  abet  J rez ess   y Meto roete    neneen see r       gt  uatason ype At oe   Ca von    gay ag  J aats  Rois  J Ratt  H   hetee  Dataa  f m   Cm jen  o          How to use the Oc   Windows   Printer Driver to send a print job    Step   Action Remarks    Open the file that you want to   AutoCAD   2000 and higher or any other  print in the source application    Windows application     2 From the  File    menu of the ap   plication  click  Print        3 Select the Oc   ColorWave 600  in the  Printer  area of the  Print   dialog box    4    Click    Properties     You can define the default print job set   tings in the Oc   Express WebTools              Chapter 5   Use the printing system 207    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Use Oc   Windows  Printer Driverto 
121. cumentation Oc   PostScript   3 Driver          Documentation Availability              Installation manual   On www oce com  Available as a PDF file in multiple lan   guages    a On Driver Pack CD ROM  Available as a PDF file in multiple lan   guages        Embedded in the application  Available in multiple languages     On line Help        i  Note   Visit Oc   on the internet at www oce com for the latest information     16 Chapter 1   Introduction    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    How to use this manual       How to use this manual    Introduction    You can access a topic quickly with the following methods   m Refer to the alphabetical index at the end of the manual   m Refer to the table of contents at the beginning of this manual   Before you turn to the complete table of contents  you can also use the following table    to find a topic quickly     The sections of this manual    The following table gives an overview of how the chapters are arranged logically     Chapters   Section       Introduction    Get to know the printing  system    m Explanation regarding the manual and    how to use it   Overview of available documentation     The Oc   ColorWave 600 printer   The Oc   Express WebTools   The finishing options        Prepare the printing system  for use and get started       Configure the printing sys   tem    Use the printing system       Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals          Install the printer    Turn the system on and off    Print t
122. dia type you use influences the output capacity     In the Oc   Express WebTools you can define the default  Delivery destination    for your   printed output    m Ifyou select  Top delivery tray  your printed output is by default delivered in the  standard  Top delivery tray       m Ifyou select  External output  back   your printed output is by default delivered at  the back of the printer  In that case you could expand your printer with one of the  following finishing options     Attention    A If you use 2 inch media cores instead of the standard 3 inch media cores  the printed  output is automatically delivered at the back of the printer  The installation of one of the  finishing options is then advised     Chapter 2   Get to know the printing system 37    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The finishing options       The finishing options     Receiving rack  basket     Illustration    The    Receiving rack  basket   is hooked  at the rear side of the printer  It can W  collect 2   5 prints  The  Receiving rack j   basket   bends the printed output  Not  all media types are appropriate for this  finishing option              Hi      Note  WL AV l  The  Receiving rack  basket   is s  not supported in combination  with the folder or Copy delivery  tray     N    Folder   Illustration    The folder is an automatic folder that  folds large sized plots     Note    The folder is not supported in  combination with the  Receiv   ing rack  basket   or Copy deliv     ery
123. dows again     na bh wR YN m    oN A      Click Reload in the toolbar or open another page  The language of the application will  be changed     mConfigure the regional settings of the   on page 119    Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 95    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    How to edit a setting       How to edit a setting    1  Browse to the settings group you want to edit  for example  Preferences     System prop   erties       Regional settings       2  Click directly on the value of a setting if you want to edit a single setting  or  click  Edit  in the settings group bar to access a window for all settings in the group if  you want to edit more settings in the settings group      i  Note   Before you can edit a setting or a settings group  you must log on as an authorized user     3  Modify the setting or settings   4  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or  Cancel  to reject your entries     96 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    View and check the settings       View and check the settings    Purpose    View and check the settings and the values that are stored when you save the settings file     When to do      Before you save the setting and the values in the Oc   Express WebTools   m To check which settings are no longer set to the factory default value      i  Note    Not all settings are stored in the settings file  The network settings are excluded from  the file because the network settin
124. e   Li  The system displays the units   mm   in   defined in the  User Preferences           Finishing options       If a folder is declared in the print system  you can check the  Fold  option     The system uses the  Image Properties    to fold the printout  in order to put the legend  on top of the folded packet     The  Delivery destination    depends on the printer capabilities and on the  Fold  option     Depending on the printer  you can set the  Delivery destination    of an unfolded printout  to     m The printer back output      Copy Delivery Tray      Two tray stacker          External output          Back output          Lower receiving tray   m The upper output      Top Delivery Tray  TDT      Integrated Receiving Tray       274 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Advanced         Finishing    settings       Note    Li  Some media types  thick media  cannot be delivered to the  Top Delivery Tray  TDT    or to the folder   A media from a roll wider than 36 inches cannot be delivered to the folder     Folded printout    When the  Fold    option is available and selected  you can edit and manually select the  top of the folded packet    The printout is automatically sent to the folder  The  Delivery destination    is automati   cally set to    Folded delivery       Note    Li  When the selected media and print settings do not allow the folded output to be delivered  with the legend on top of the folded packe
125. e SIZC              c ceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeteeees 301  The output CELIVETY           cccceeecesssssesseeaneeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseesseeeessennaned 303  Make a new media profile available on the printer operator panel 306  Define the correct media for your JObS      sssssssssssssssrsnssssnsnnnserernnnsrsens 307  Laminate the Medidas anadenia niaaa 308  C  tthe medidos ds cvacaved cabeeneceueddacclasdvastlaiseeeeieddieldivadea 309   Chapter 8  Print quality and Print productivity             cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeessesssseessseeeaeeeaees 311  Main settings that influence the print QUAIitY            cccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 312  Main settings that influence the print productivity    314  Set the     Color Mode sesticicshevevedstieicadivds haceiomntettlides aastataesiatveieddeaadies 316  Set the  Print SEG    ainssi aranais snes dieeenewauyesernay 317  Set the    Production PIUS  S ttiNg             cccceeceeeeneceeeee cesses ceeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 321  Set the    Economy monochrome enhanced  setting                  eeeeeee 322  Set the  Oc   Print Assistant Behavior                   cccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 323  Set the  PDF processing optimization               ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 324  Set the  PDF Wipeout COrrectiOn                ccssccsssseeceeeeeeceeeeeceeeeseeesseeesssees 325  Set the  Long plot MOE  0 0 2    ceeeeeceeeeeeeeecee ce eeeeeeaeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeens 326  Set the    Automatic roll switch  20 0 2    eee e ee eeeneeee eee eeeeeeaeeee
126. e roll holder with the new media  roll in the correct roll position       5  Roll loader     optional  Helps the operator to load a media roll        Chapter 5   Use the printing system 145    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Remove a media roll    Remove a media roll    How to remove a media roll    Attention   A Do not open the media drawer during the print process     Attention   A Do not open more than one media drawer at the same time to prevent overbalance of  the printer     Caution   A Watch your fingers when you handle the media roll     Action Illustration    Open the media drawer that  contains the media roll that you  want to remove        Roll back the media manually to    remove the media from the met   al paper guide    Then  use both hands  as indicat   ed  to lift the roll holder with the    media roll           146 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Remove a media roll    Action Illustration    Put the roll holder with the me   dia roll on the roll loading sta   tion     Pull the handle of the roll holder    locking mechanism towards you     Remove the roll holder from the  core of the media roll     6 Remove the media roll from the  roll loading station        Chapter 5   Use the printing system 147    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Unpack the media roll       Unpack the media roll    How to unpack a media roll    Attention   A Handle the media roll with care  A dented media ro
127. e the settings in a file    1   2     Click the  Configuration  tab or the    Preferences    tab    Click  Save set    in the top right hand corner of the screen  A secondary window is  opened    Navigate to a location on the network to store the file    Save the settings lt hostname of printer gt  lt date gt  xml file  The file name is not fixed  You  can change the name if required    Click  Ok  to confirm or  Cancel  to close the window without storing the file     98 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load the settings from a file       Load the settings from a file    Purpose    Load the settings and the values for the Oc   Express WebTools from a file     When to do      Duplicate the settings to another printer of the same type     Attention    A When you are logged in as a Key operator you can only load the Key operator settings   When you are logged in as a System administrator you can only load the System admin   istrator settings  To load all the settings that are stored in the file you must log in as a  Power user      i  Note   Not all settings are stored in the settings file  The network settings are excluded from  the file because the network settings cannot be duplicated to another printer  The pass   words for authorized users and the passwords for remote scan destinations are excluded  from the file for security reasons  License information is not included in the file either     How to load the settings
128. ect the  System  tab     Select the  Maintenance     tab with the upper left softkey     Use the    Scroll wheel    to select    Clear system    and  confirm with the  Confirmation key   above the    Scroll    wheel         a Dome prot  Prnt a aerma mage          218 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Clear the system         Action Illustration    Follow the steps in the wizard     arruta you toc wer    femeers De noriem    Pross test te surt    Select  Yes  to clear the system   are ee ere y wA te Clee Te  Note  coven   This action cannot be undone  ee TAE    Select  Finish    The system is now cleared     The system is Cleared    Sresi Fana to cantra        Select  Back  to return to the  System  screen     Calibration  Caldr ate the provir    Py Deme pret  Prnt s dere mage        lt   Usage Counters       Chapter 5   Use the printing system 219    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Clear the system    Action Illustration    Select  Home  to return to the  Home  screen        220 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       How to solve problems with print jobs       Solve problems with print jobs  How to solve problems with print jobs    Introduction    If there is a problem with a print job  the color of the green    Jobs   Queue    bar in the Oc    Express WebTools turns red    The System Monitor section of the Oc   Express WebTools displays the message   User  int
129. ed     m The time when the job was printed out  after the print is finished  or when it reached  the final state   m The name of the printer  in  Information        Once a job is in  History  you can     m Configure the    Job properties     see    View the settings    on page 249   m Reprint it  see    Reprint a job   on page 248     Remove it  see    Remove one or several jobs from the History    on page 249     To delete all jobs from the    History     click the  Clear History    button     Note    Li  The  History  section can store up to 50 jobs  Above 50  the oldest jobs are removed   Only the jobs submitted by the user during the running session are displayed  If you  close and re open the application or if you connect to another printer  see    Change  printer        on page 235   the  History  section is cleared     Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 245    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Job  Status        Job  Status     Introduction    Find below the list of possible statuses of a job  More details about the reasons of the  status are provided in the    Information    field                             Job  Status    If the  Status  of a   Then   job is       Submitting    The job has been submitted and the data is not all received by  the printer    A progress bar shows the progress of the data submission       Queued  The job has been completely submitted    The position of the job in the printer queue is displayed   It is still possible to
130. ed From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the  Print Setting          Set the    Print Setting       Introduction    You can use the  Print Setting    in the  Preferences     Print job defaults       Basic    section  to define the default print quality value for your print jobs      il Note     Ifyou set a value for this setting in your print job submission application  Oc   Windows    printer driver or Oc   Publisher Select  and the Oc   job ticket is enabled  the value of  this setting will overrule the default value     Setting   Description          Oc   Print As    For true  Green button  printing  Oc   has developed the  Oc   Print   sistant    Assistant     Ifyou select the  Oc   Print Assistant     the Oc   ColorWave  600 automatically selects the print setting   Economy        Production         Production Plus  or  Presentation     that best fits the file with respect  to the file content   The fast  Economy  print setting will be used for low coverage area  files  The  Presentation  print setting will be used for high coverage  area files   You can use the  Preferences       System properties       Printer proper   ties       Oc   Print Assistant Behavior  setting to adjust the thresholds  for switching from one mode to another  using the  Oc   Print Assis   tant Slider      With this setting you can fine tune the  Oc   Print As   sistant    to optimize further speed and quality to your personal needs    see    Set the  Oc   Print Assistant Behavior    on page 323
131. edia type that has been disabled on the printer controller   an error message is displayed   The selected media type is not available        Media size    selection     i     Automatic media size selection     When you activate the  Automatic media size selection     you keep a 100  scale and you  can decide to cut the media to the image size or to a standard sheet size     m    Print at 1 1 scale and cut to image size     default value   m    Print at 1 1 scale on a standard sheet size        Manual Media Size selection     When you activate the  Manual Media Size selection     you can         Scale to roll width    Scale the image to the width of a selected roll  Select the    roll size  taking the rotation settings into account            Scale to standard sheet  size       Scale the image to fit a standard sheet size  Select the stan   dard sheet size                Note   When the template refers to a media size that has been disabled on the printer controller   an error message is displayed   The selected media size is not available         Media source    selection    240    When you add a file to a job  the system analyzes it and selects the most appropriate  media size for this document   Choose whether it must           Select any enabled me    The system picks the media from the list of all media en   dia    abled on the printer  even if the selected media is not  loaded on the printer           Select loaded media The system picks the media from the list of media 
132. ee Set the mage Properties    on page 259    m Tune the Basic    settings  see     Basic  settings    on page 262    m Tune the  Advanced  settings     Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 257    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The  Edit Document Print Settings    window         the  Media  settings  see    Advanced  Media  settings on page 265      the  Layout  settings  see      Advanced      Layout    settings    on page 268      the  Rendering    settings  see    Advanced    Rendering  settings    on page 271     the  Finishing    settings  see       Advanced    Finishing  settings    on page 274     the    Stamping    settings  see      Note   Li  When a feature is unavailable or not declared on the printer  the related settings are  hidden or grayed out in the  Edit Document Print Settings    window     258 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the    Image Properties          Set the  Image Properties       Introduction    In the    Image Properties    section  you can describe the original image and control its display  in the preview     If needed  check and adjust the   m    File format    parameters  m    Image Orientation     the    Reading orientation    and the  Legend position         i  Note     The system uses this information to define how to print and fold the image      File Format       Click the  File Format    button to display the file format and the related parameters  if  a
133. eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 327  Set the    Spool threShold               cccecceessseesseeseseessceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesseees 328  Set the  Print while RIP    S tting             cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 329   8    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Contents       Set the  Rotation    MOCEC            ceceeccceceeeeeeeeeee ee eeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeeesaaeees 330  Set the  AlignMent  mode            ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeaeaeeens 331  Color Manageme nt           c cccccccceesececeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeecaeeaeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeesensaeeees 332  What is Color MaNaGeMeENt             ceeeeeesceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeesaeaees 332  What is an input profile   standardization                  cssssssssssseeeeeees 333  Whatis Color feel  isiannya aa aatan nana 336  What are Rendering intents             sssseseeessessiesnessrnnnnnnerernnnsnnnrnnn nnne 338  Definition of rendering intents          s essessseesesesrrnrrsssernnnssnernnnn 338   Perceptual  photo   20    cece cesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeae 339     Saturation  business GraphiCs             cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 340   Relative colorimetric  20 2 2    cece ceeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeae 341   Absolute colorimetric  02       cece ceeeeeeeeeeee eee eee eeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeas 342  What is an Output Profile              cccesscessceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeesssseesseeeeees 343  Color management settings in the Oc   E
134. eevee af  paet morn puite  B Deme priar   Prnt s oema mege       See the vtta Comers    Select  Home  to return to the  Home  screen        Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 383    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Calibrate the Oc   ColorWave 600 printer    Step   Action Remarks    9  Home  screen           Result    Evaluate the Customer Acceptance Test print  Check if the print does not show any of  the following output quality problems     Banding across the print with differences in color and gloss    on page 375     Horizontal  wavy lines across your print    on page 377  m    Thin horizontal  coloued or white lines across your print    on page 379    If no output quality problems occur  the installation procedure is finished and your Oc    ColorWave 600 is ready for use     384 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Calibration error codes       Calibration error codes    Introduction    Before or during the calibration  it is possible that the calibration failed  In that case  you  will be informed immediately through an error code on the  Printer operator panel        Attention    A Error codes are only displayed at the  Printer operator panel     If an error code is displayed  that is not related to the calibration process  the user must follow the instructions on the  printer operator panel to solve the problem     Note   Li  For feedback about errors related to the processing of 
135. em  the Key operator takes  care of the system s daily maintenance and is authorized to  change all default settings in the    Preferences    tab of the Oc    Express WebTools      Key operator               System administra    The System administrator takes care of the integration of the  tor    system into the IT infrastructure of the customer    The System administrator is authorized to change all settings  in the  Configuration  tab of the Oc   Express WebTools         The Power user is authorized to access all functionalities of the  Oc   Express WebTools        Power user                   110 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    User roles and authorizations       Note   i  You do not need a password for the normal use of the system     Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 111    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Log in as an authorized user       Log in as an authorized user    Purpose    In order to have write access for certain groups of settings  you must log in as an authorized  user  There are 3 user roles  System administrator  Key operator and Power user who have  authorization to edit specific groups of settings  You do not need to log in before you  start a session  The system will only display a message when you need to log in to perform  an action     Before you begin    Navigate through the tabs and select the value of a setting you wish to change     How to log in as an authorized use
136. em software is initializing           Printer paused       The system pauses the print queue but keeps access  to all other functionality           Processing          E E h   Ba     Ready to print     ja    The system is receiving or processing data     State when there is no active job and no waiting  job    When a job arrives  no user intervention is needed  to start printing         Printing    lt job name gt     State when a print job is active         Processing    lt job            name gt         Receiving    lt job   name gt     ja          The system is processing the job data     The system is receiving the job data        170 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       The system monitor and the system states       The toner states    Description      Toner low  empty or cartridge not present           Chapter 5   Use the printing system 171    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Switch on or switch off the printer  Control the printer    Switch on or switch off the printer    How to switch on or switch off the printer    On   off switch  Illustration       The  On   Off switch    at the front side of    On   Off switch     19    the printer    Use this switch in your daily work to    switch on and switch off the printer        The green main power switch at the rear   side of the printer    Use this switch only if you must connect   or disconnect the mains supply of the   printer    To disconnect the mains sup
137. en you unpack a media roll  always write the correct media name and media code  inside the core  In that case  if you replace a media roll before it is empty and you want  to re use the media roll later  you will have the correct media information available     Caution   Watch your fingers when you handle the media roll     Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load a media roll    Action Illustration    Open the correct media drawer  to load the new media roll     Place the new media roll on the  roll loading station     Pull the handle of the roll holder    locking mechanism towards you        Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started 75    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load a media roll    Action Illustration    Slide the roll holder in the core    of the new media roll     Align the roll with the correct   size indicator on the roll holder   At the left and right hand side    Release the handle of the locking    mechanism     Remove the tapes from the new  media roll  Use both hands  as  indicated  to place the media roll  in the media drawer           76 Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Load a media roll    Action Illustration    Keep the media tight on the roll  and in line with the side edge        8 Use both hands to turn the me   dia roll backwards until the me   dia flap ha
138. er 2   Get to know the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the  Oc   Finishing Assistant          Set the  Oc   Finishing Assistant       Introduction    This setting is only available when the  Configuration     Printer setup       Finishing        Finisher configuration type    setting is set to  Estefold       The  Oc   Finishing Assistant    can automatically detect the legend  if present  of a drawing  and rotate and align the drawing so the legend will be on the cover page of the fold  package  If no legend can be detected the print is delivered unfolded    When enabled  the  Oc   Finishing Assistant    overrules the default rotation and alignment  settings for folded output     Before you begin    This setting is editable for the Key operator or Power user     How to set the  Oc   Finishing Assistant       1  Click  Preferences     Print job defaults         Layout       2  Click  Edit  in the  Layout  bar or click the value of the  Oc   Finishing Assistant    setting    3  Select Enabled    if the printer must automatically detect the legend of your drawings and  fold the drawings correctly    4  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or  Cancel  to reject your entries     Chapter 2   Get to know the printing system 41    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the  Oc   Finishing Assistant          42 Chapter 2   Get to know the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Chapter 3   Prepare the printing sys
139. er Copy  For copy jobs  you must select the Publisher Copy scan destination     Illustration    TCy Power Logic Controller          To select the Publisher Copy scan destination you can do the following    m Select an existing template on the scanner operator panel  open the  Destination  setting  and change it to Publisher Copy      Access the  Templates  workspace and replace an existing template with a Publisher  Copy template   See    Define a Publisher Copy scan template    on page 251      250 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Define a Publisher Copy scan template    Define a Publisher Copy scan template    Before you begin    To define a Publisher Copy scan template  you must access the  Templates  workspace   The Templates    section displays an overview of the existing  Templates on the scanner  operator panel    and the  Template Library        Illustration    TCy Power Logic Controller          l ts anmes pprt ate    __      erpat nere Petticher Copy Foste    Phote  24 ba coter  THT  680 ap    btw CAL Grawing e Vubieter C avy  hdd Lnestsnt  1 tat NFF  200 one      Jegh quality poate  hed rete  24 be coher  TH 000 tpi       Pubnshe Copy Anwen  Aea  24 bt cotar  TEF        Onginat wpe  one    Map  24 dt cole POF  400 aoe  Orginal mam    Hamers ea       Define a Publisher Copy scan template    1    Create a  New  Publisher Copy scan template   or  m Select an existing scan template from the  Template Library   
140. ervention required       The job that has the problem remains in the queue as an active job  displayed in bold  fonts  You can receive detailed information about the problem and how to solve this  problem via the printer operator panel     The most common problem with print jobs is that the requested media for the job is not  available  The procedure below gives additional information about how the printer handles  a media request     Note    Li  For more information about how to solve problems with print jobs  please refer to the  Online Help information in the Oc   Express WebTools  You can get access to the Online  Help information if you click on  Help  in the upper right corner of the Oc   Express  WebTools screen     Media request via the printer operator panel    1  The printer operator panel displays the following message        2  Load the media as requested    see Load a media roll    on page 74     Chapter 5   Use the printing system 221    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    How to solve problems with print jobs       Attention    A If the    Media request time out    expires  the    Action after media request time out    setting  decides if the job is put on hold or if the print job will be deleted   see    Configure the     Media request time out    on page 121     3  The printer continues printing     222 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    View events       View events    Introduction    Feedback about
141. eseeteeeeeeesees   ONEVIEW rretra nesters heii EEEIEE   pass Word sessezsuseossnsesesseesssesessssvaieosonsiobosesicoss   preferences tab  siiscsiecescsssssdsscestsscesesesciesszeiesesss   print job defaults                restore factory defaults        save the settings in a file         SUPPOEE tabis sisir rana AE   System requirements    s ssssssssssssssssessrerereseseseres   system tA Doe R   user roles and authorizations   view and check the settings     ss ssessseseesessesseeee  Oce Finishing Assistant   Oce Finishing Assistant 0 0    41  Oc   License Logic   ACCESS six  A E E ES 391  Oc   Media Profile   Oc   Media Profile sicsisscsccsisscsrscsntsecsctveesteeens 283  Oc   PostScript   3 Driver   IE N E AE T 209  Oce Print Assistant    431       behavior    seines areire aaa 323   slider eee en e e EAE 323  Oc   Print Assistant   Oc   Print Assistant sssssssssssrsrssrsirssssdss  rssssssosr 272  Oce Print Assistant setting   Oce Print Assistant setting 0    eee 317  Oc   Publisher Copy   Change printers cisscassssraversestecersssriessssssasoeses 235   IMCCOMUCHIOMN  eisioes RRRS 230   Overview a aranesa TETIK NORIETA 232   Print  copy  templates     ss ssssssssessesessesseseese 237   Scan destination      ccccccecsesscesscesscessessseeseeees 250   User Preferences         cccsccssessessesscsscsscssesecseees 234  Oc   Publisher Express   Oc   Publisher Express      sssssssssesseieeeseeseseese 202  Oc   Publisher Select   automatic legend detection 0    205   job submissi
142. esestiaes cucsssveisshocyscesspeceecseseveccennseens 234  Layout  ATOMENE areren E RN 268  Mat gins ecsecsicscsnesrscvaveousdveadetudsedsauessstecrieceseess 268  Orientation of the image in the 0    268  Reduce to fit   ccccccccccssccsscssscsssessscssesssssssesses 263  Scale Factor Hic disseartavsssstvtescvatcacsstcnusesenns 268  Scal   to format   ccsesscbsececuxestiatnede oi eeni  263  Leading strip  Leading StHip    cscesseassisosevesssavedescstseesieszsnaess 274  Legend  automatic detection        cscsesessessessesseseeseceeees  WARMING onnsa naese es eaeadeaesets 276  Legend location  Legend location ssiri 260  License       430    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       s  ttings from a Messiers 99   toner CaLtrid Ge siceraria 64  Log in   Oc   Express WebTools    s sssssssseseessessesesseese 112  Log out   Logout sesnnnnnimoininn inin a o 113  Logo and business colors   adyised settings sssisisiiissosiisss istisini 363  Long plot mode   Long plot mod   isis s daicassassiesiseisssvsievesessssiers 326  LPR   job submission senaren 212  M  Main settings   print Quality sssscs  ceacssescsedeisesvesbsesssssasevesesscess 317  Mains supply cable   Mains supply cable sssini 52  Maintenance   Calibrate wiscvsaisaniensdedtedisiamnraennades 381    Maintenance tray  Maintenance tray      ceeeeeeee       replace the maintenance tray  Manage the media profiles   Manage the media profiles       cece 284  Managing licenses   Managing licenses       cceeeeseseeeseeeseeeeeeeeee
143. ess    Oc   Publisher Express   jobs WebTools Access to  Queue    and  Mailbox     Manage  jobs Workstation   serv     Oc   Publisher Select       er Oc   Windows   Printer Driver    Oc   PostScript   3 Driver    Manage    Printer operator  m Access to    Queue    and  Mailbox   jobs panel             Chapter 5   Use the printing system 191    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Create  manage and print jobs       Note   Li  You can find detailed information about Oc   job submission applications and Oc    printer drivers in    the Oc   Windows   Printer Driver Online Help    the Oc   Windows   Printer Driver User manual    the Oc   PostScript   3 Driver Online Help  the    Oc   Publisher Select    Online Help  the  Oc   Publisher Select  User manual    192 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    What you need to know before you send your print jobs       Set up print jobs  What you need to know before you send your print jobs    Definition    Before you send print jobs to the Oc   ColorWave 600  remember the following     m The values defined in the Oc   Express WebTools are default values for the general  system behavior  You can define a number of job settings in the Oc   printer drivers  or the Oc   job submission tools  The settings defined in the printer drivers or the job  submission tools always overrule the settings defined in the Oc   Express WebTools    m Make sure that you define the correct print setting mode
144. ess the Oc   Express WebTools      A treterwm ey wonhooe mirens amt  a   aa       Note    If the Oc   Express WebTools do not appear  contact the network administrator to check  the network parameters  Check if the Oc   ColorWave 600 network settings have been  registered in the network infrastructure       Select    Configuration         Connectivity        In the    Identification    section  click    Edit        Use the password  SysAdm  or the new password to logon as System administrator   see       Change the password for authorized users   on page 114     Express WebTools       Note   It is advised to change the password   see    Change the password for authorized users    on    page 114     80 Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Complete the printer configuration in the Oc   Express WebTools       6  Once logged in  enter the printer  Host name   for example  OceColorWave6oo  in the     Identification    window  in order to address the Oc   ColorWave 600 by its  Host name      You can define the other settings if needed  Restart is required     hey oper ster parsnard    Gener Irar       Dy F    usen dapin rode Asonete setoctan     Erm   ZAD seon    bue   DO  J trated ste 4  Kom         7  Turn the printer off and on to restart the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system    8  Wait until the system is ready again    9  Enter the following address   http    lt Oc   ColorWave 600 Hostname gt    for e
145. essiesnsssnas 360  2D CAD color   advised SCEIMGS erenn anr 359  2D CAD monochrome     dyised settings anasi aa 358  3D CAD   adyised settings  cissssssesissverdsssevedeierssescsesssesees 373    A  a submitted job   Cancel oinar e RAR E 248   Job prOperties  sisis  ssc  sasesssesscessasienssesancoasssesese 249   Reprint   SAUS E RAEN E EE  About   licenses  Absolute colorimetric   Absolute colorimetric    sesser 342  Action after media request time out   Action after media request time out               121  Activate   SYSCEMD MONIO sensisse nisi 168  Active job   delete sisisi csin itik isara 216 217   PAUSE E ETE E  216   FESUN menene e EER ESS 216   SLOP E E E E  216  Active jobs   ACHVE JODS iiris testan 244  Add leading strip   Add leading Strip  sisisscisesssisissssdssrcasssncrssveeatvs 137  Add margins around image   Add margins around image        ccccceeeee 270  Add trailing strip   Add trailing strip oesssenannocnansmnmes 137  Additional strips   Additional strips    sscisssovsscoessssasessoseosssevioeaees 274  Adjust   Top delivery tray s ssssssscsseessecsavesssevssascosasseaees 187    Advised settings  2D CAD and rendering  2D CAD color           e  2D CAD monochrome    426    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals          ID CD essai eii aa e icadeed EE    business graphics                 consumer graphics                logo and business colors         IMAP ER ERE EErEE AE NSE   mized Content ss ovevesess sedeossa sesesssnsesssavendvesevessis   PHOLO  lt s
146. essneees 244   The    Active jobs    section and the    History    section               0 244   OD StAtUs sinceccsuastaactacteestuetedansccentasieacttelesterusscsbsestvecadeessenestanes 246   Track and manage a submitted JOD             ccscsesscesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 248   Copy settings related to the SCANNEL                cssscccccseceeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseees 250   New SCAN CEStINATION        ccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeceeeaueeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 250   Define a Publisher Copy scan template            ccccccccccceeessseesseseeseees 251   Do a basic copy job     Direct copy mode    enabled                    000000000e 253   Basic COPY JOD           cccsscssscccssccceceeeeeceeeeseeeeesseesseeeseceeesusueeanseeeeceeeneess 253   Do an extended copy job  Direct copy mode    disabled                  0 255   Extended COPY JOD iiicncsedecsestiticctestecdeedescdeceiesbvede lel oideecticeeaithaietesiads 255   Edit and adjust the document print SettingS                 ssseeeeeeeee 257   The  Edit Document Print Settings    WINdOW              cseeeeee 257       Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Contents          Set the  Image Properties                cccceeceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeae 259   Print PreViGW         cccccscccssesssssseessnneeeneeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeessseesssseeees 261  Set the Basic and Advanced SettingS              cccessceceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 262   BASIC    SOTtINGS          eeeceeceeeeeeee cece eee eeeeeeaeee eee eeeaaeaeeeeeeese
147. ethod          ccccesesesseeseeeeeseeeee    Print example    2D CAD and rendering    eee  2D CAD COMO wiissscssssssissserscatassnscssiavasvcis  2D CAD monochrome utes  JD CAD niacara  business graphics siesiesisrissssiesissiuteiiiesesss  consumer PrAaphics rsi  stisciscrssesiaedsstorereises se  logo and business colors      ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees    HAPs sestesie ctossesssesesessassoe  mixed content    POLO wissctesensieisstiedssesss    photo realistic impression      eeeeeeeeeees  point of sales graphics wo    cere    Print job defaults    add leading strip occ eeeeeeeeeeeees  add trailing Strip     cscscscssssivcssseetcheconststieess  APEN vecesiscccsessscusscoiersunbendsscardeotetieonsts    collate             color mode nsss  custom print length       delivery destination        ceseeeeeees  economy monochrome enhanced        h    rizontal Shift cciessicssssscesvessssseievedssctzsovess  media selection policy wcrc  IMEMIA SOUNGE sessiscsisrisocecssscssecssoiteacesesitsiess  GILLON ssa sdestesddisessesessvassnssszevdeeseseess Sa Rana  number of Sets  aaen e aaea  Oc   Express WebTools oo    cece  print cut method wees  print setting oo    eseseseeseseseeeseeeseteeeeeeseneees    production plus                      rotation        138   scalere z138   vertical shift        138  Print Preview   Print Preview aniisi esain 261   CONEDE scssscsdesccseoesssssiaisrstnvendestasdbeideneonsts 261   Image orientation      s ssssesserisieseereresieresess 261  Print productivity   MAIN SOUL
148. etting       Restrict remote actions on jobs to the  operator          Display a view on all Smart Inbox jobs      Keep completed jobs in the Smart Inbox            Expiration time out for Smart Inbox For example  8 hours  jobs        Chapter 5   Use the printing system 199    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Open or create a Smart Inbox       Open or create a Smart Inbox    Open or create a Smart Inbox in the  Smart Inbox    section  1  Select the  Jobs  tab     2  In the    Smart Inbox  section click  Open Smart Inbox       3  Click on the blank field to open a drop down list with all Smart Inboxes available on  your system that contain one or more jobs  You can open an existing Smart Inbox from  the list or you can type the name of a new Smart Inbox    4  Press Enter or click on  Smart Inbox     The Smart Inbox is now displayed in the  Smart Inbox  section     Open or create a Smart Inbox in Oc   Publisher Express  1  Select the  Jobs  tab     2  Click on  Create new job  in the Oc   Publisher Express section    3  In the    Workflow    section click on the Smart Inbox field to open a drop down list with  all Smart Inboxes available on your system that contain one or more jobs  You can open  an existing Smart Inbox from the list or you can type the name of a new Smart Inbox    4  Click  Ok  to send the print job to the Smart Inbox    The Smart Inbox is now displayed in the  Smart Inbox  section     200 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From Man
149. event all dithering   because inkjet printers never have an ink to match every color  Saturation rendering  intent can minimize dithering if the color is very close to pure                    340 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Relative colorimetric           Relative colorimetric       Relative colorimetric keeps an almost exact relationship between in gamut colors   even if this clips out of gamut colors    The relative colorimetric rendering method replaces the colors to align the old white  point  the location of the most pure and light white in a color space  with the new  white point and to keep the relative positions of the colors  The Relative colorimetric  rendering intent is advised for logos  spot colors or PowerPoint presentations  but  the loss of contrast can be a problem with photos and images     Note    Li  If you generate a color scan to file job in TIFF format on an Oc   TCS 400   an Oc   TCS 500 or an Oc   TDS450     Relative colorimetric    gives the best  result                       Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 341    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Absolute colorimetric           Absolute colorimetric          Absolute colorimetric is similar to relative colorimetric  but uses a different method  to handle the white point    Absolute and relative colorimetric both keep gamut colors and clip those out of  gamut  but absolute colorimetric also keeps 
150. gle between the first  language and the second language     Note    Only the first language  default language  and  the second language  alternative language  de   fined in the Oc   Express WebTools are avail   able on the Printer operator panel        Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 131    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Configure the network settings on the printer operator panel       Configure the network settings on the printer operator panel    When to do    When you have no connection to the Oc   ColorWave 600 printer you cannot use the  Oc   Express WebTools to edit the network settings  This situation can occur at first in   stallation or when there is no network connection due to invalid network settings     Before you begin    If you integrate the printer according to a network policy  contact your network admin   istrator to get information about the network infrastructure and parameters    As a network administrator  please refer to the Oc   TDS TCS Connectivity Manual   available on CD delivered with your system  to get information about the different net   work infrastructures and configurations     How to configure the network settings on the printer operator panel    Action Illustration    In the  Home  screen of the printer operator panel se   lect  System  with the lower left softkey     Select  Configuration  with the upper right softkey           132 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Ma
151. gs cannot be duplicated to another printer  The pass   words for authorized users and the passwords for remote scan destinations are excluded  from the file for security reasons  License information is not included in the file either     How to view and check the settings  1  Click the    Configuration    tab or the  Preferences  tab   2  Click  View set    in the top right hand corner of the screen  A secondary window is  opened   3  Scroll through the list of settings  The first column displays the setting and the second  column displays the values  A    indicates that the value of the setting is different from  the original factory default value      i  Note   You can print the information with the standard print function of your browser     Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 97    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Save the settings in a file       Save the settings in a file    Purpose    Save the settings and the values that you configured in the Oc   Express WebTools in a  file     When to do     i    m Duplicate the settings very easily to another printer of the same type     Note    Not all settings are stored in the settings file  The network settings are excluded from  the file because the network settings cannot be duplicated to another printer  The pass   words for authorized users and the passwords for remote scan destinations are excluded  from the file for security reasons  License information is not included in the file either     How to sav
152. gure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Configure the energy save modes of the Oc   ColorWave 600       Configure the energy save modes of the Oc   ColorWave 600    Introduction    The Oc   ColorWave 600 offers two energy save modes that you can set if the printer is  idle for a defined period  The configuration of the timers prevents unnecessary power  consumption  You can adjust the value of the timers     When to do    Sleep mode timer  Default value 1 hour     The Oc   ColorWave 600 uses minimal energy  because the power supply of the printer  is turned off  The power supply of the embedded Oc   ColorWave 600 controller     Oc    PowerM controller       Oc   PowerM Plus controller    remains on  The printer needs to  warm up when it wakes up from the sleep mode     Energy save mode timer  Default value 15 minutes     Both the printer and the Oc   ColorWave 600 controller remain turned on  The Oc    ColorWave 600 uses less energy than in normal operating mode  but the printer uses  more energy than in sleep mode  The advantage of the energy save mode over the sleep  mode is that the printer usually needs just a few seconds to wake up  Only when the  printer has not been used for more than 1 hour does the printer need more time to wake    up     Note    Li  The value you set for the sleep mode timer must be higher than the energy save mode  value  If the value of the sleep mode is lower than the energy save mode  the printer skips  the ener
153. gy save mode and goes into sleep mode  The power consumption will be lower  but it will also take the printer a bit longer to wake up again     How to configure the time out value of the energy save modes    1  Click  Preferences       System properties       2  Click    Edit    in the  Printer properties    bar or click the value of the    Sleep mode time out     setting or the  Energy saving mode time out  setting    3  Enter a new value in the Edit window and click  Ok  to confirm your entries or    Cancel     to reject your entries     Note   li  If you access the Edit window by clicking the value of the setting you want to change   the Edit window displays the minimal and maximal value you can select     Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 123    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Configure the energy save modes of the Oc   ColorWave 600        i  Note     When the Oc   ColorWave 600 is in the energy save mode  there are two ways to activate  the system     m press a key on the printer operator panel   m send a job     124 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Configure the media sizes       Configure the media sizes    Introduction    You must indicate in the Oc   Express WebTools the following settings   m The core size of the media rolls  m The media sizes    How to define the core size of the media    Attention   A Access the Oc   Express WebTools  This setting is editable for the Key operator and 
154. h toner     Remove the toner pollution with    the clean card from the guide  flap  The pollution  which is  dislodged  should be removed    from the print surface  into the    direction of the  Top left cover    You can find the clean card in  the clean card holder at the un   derside of the  Top cover   left  hand side         4 Put back the clean card in the  clean card holder        Chapter 5   Use the printing system 185    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Check and clean the guide flap    Illustration    Close the top cover and replace  the top delivery tray     see    Close the  Top cover  and flap  back the  Top delivery tray    on  page 180           186 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Adjust the  Top delivery tray       Adjust the    Top delivery tray       Introduction    This document describes how to adjust the  Top delivery tray        When to do    When you want to prevent printed output from curling     Required tool    m Cross screwdriver    Illustration       How to adjust the Top delivery tray    Action Illustration    Pull up the metal guide of the   Top delivery tray           Chapter 5   Use the printing system 187    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Adjust the  Top delivery tray       Illustration    Use your finger or the cross  screwdriver to adjust the position    of the metal guide  both sides      Flap back the metal guide to  check if the adjustment is cor   rect    
155. have to match  This means that if you have set the color settings in more  than 1 stage of the process described above  you must check if the color settings do not    counteract with each other     348 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Color management settings for HP GL  HP GL 2 and HP RTL files           Color management settings for HP GL  HP GL 2 and HP RTL  files       The default settings are emphasized     Input profile Color Management settings    Input da    Standardization  Color feel  Rendering intent  ta    sRGB     Oc   CAD colours       AdobeRGB      Euroscale coat     Oc   enhanced colors       Perceptual  photo    ed   Saturation  business       Euroscale un  graphics      coated     Absolute colorimet        US Web coat  ric       ed  SWOP      Relative colorimet    US Web un  ric     coated      Simulated Oc   TCS400 CAD colors         Simulated non Oc   printer  vivid colors     Simulated non Oc   printer  match screen colors          1             Simulated non Oc   printer  no color correction       None  managed by application         The output quality of a simulated non Oc   printer setting depends on the selected input  profile for simulated printers  Make sure you use the correct input profile for simulated    printers     Oc   ColorWave 600 path  Support   Input profiles        Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 349    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Co
156. he    Customer Analysis Tool     print  CAT      General settings to configure the  printing system    Configure the printer   Configure print jobs     Work with the printer  set up  moni   tor  control and solve problems with  the printer     Create print jobs  set up  monitor   control and solve problems with print    jobs      Chapter 1   Introduction 17    How to use this manual          Chapters       The Oc   Publisher Copy    option    Manage media on the Oc    ColorWave 600 printing  system    Section                   Overview of Oc   Publisher Copy   m Copy settings related to the scanner     Do a basic copy job     Direct copy  mode    enabled      Do an extended copy job     Direct copy  mode    disabled     Overview media related settings   m Manage media profiles           8 Print quality and Print pro   ductivity       License management             m Settings that influence the print quali   ty   print productivity    m Color management settings    m Print examples    m Check  analyze and solve output  quality problems of print jobs           Manage licenses                                Appendix   Specifications m System specifications    A   Supported media types and sizes     Appendix General information Reader s comment sheet    B   Appendix   General information Addresses of local Oc   organizations    C          18 Chapter 1   Introduction    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Chapter 2  Get to know the printing  system    Downloaded From Man
157. he clean cut length for  your new media roll and confirm your entry with the     Confirmation key       Note   Select  Long strip    for new media     Press  Finish  and return to the  Home  screen     Note   When the strip is cut  the new media is ready  for use        302 Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       The output delivery       The output delivery    Introduction    There are four factors that can influence the delivery destination of the printed output     1  The media profile of the media you use   Some media profiles require a specific output delivery  If the correct media profile is available  on your printer operator panel  the Oc   ColorWave 600 automatically selects the correct  output delivery   If the correct media is not available on your printer operator panel  you can download the  media profile from the Oc   website  see    Download a media profile from the Oc   web site    on  page 286  and upload the media profile to the  Oc   PowerM controller       Oc   PowerM Plus  controller    see    Upload a media profile    on page 287     2  The media roll core size of the media you use    3  The  Delivery destination    setting that you defined in the Oc   Express WebTools   To set the default  Delivery destination    select the    Preferences       Print job defaults    tab    4  When you define print job settings in the printer drivers or the job submission tools  these  values 
158. he front cover in case    of a media jam         Top cover     14        Note    Normally you open the top cover in case  of a media jam  to check the guide flap   see    Check and clean the guide flap    on  page 184  or to check the print surface  see     Check and clean the print surface    on page  181         176 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Cover or door opened    Displayed warning Position of the component     Top back cover   9     Cose Ve tap Doce cover    Note   Normally you open the top back cover in  case of a media jam        Chapter 5   Use the printing system 177    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Pull up the    Top delivery tray  and open the    Top cover       Pull up the    Top delivery tray    and open the    Top cover     How to pull up the    Top delivery tray    and open the    Top cover     Illustration    Pull up the left part of the top  delivery tray     Lock the left part of the top de   livery tray with the metal locking  mechanism    Repeat step 1 and 2 for the right  part of the top delivery tray     Open the  Top cover              178 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Pull up the    Top delivery tray  and open the    Top cover    Illustration       Check and clean the print surface     on page 181  1  or    Check and  clean the guide flap    on page 184   2         Chapter 5   Use the printing system 179    Downloaded F
159. he media series  the  system automatically adds the new media size to the custom media series     4  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or    Cancel    to reject your entries     282 Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    What is a media profile        What is a media profile     Definition  A media profile is also called an Oc   Media Profile  OMP file   The media profile contains  a number of preset values that give the best print result per media type for your system   By default the system already has a number of media profiles available after installation   but due to changes in the production methods for media  the profiles can also change  over time  When a new version is available you can retrieve the new profile from the  corporate web site  http   mediaguide oce com    When a new media type becomes available that you want your Oc   ColorWave 600 to  support  you can install the corresponding Media Profile     Attributes    For each media type the media profile optimizes a number of settings   m Mixing of colors  system setting  cannot be modified    m Settings for optimal paper handling and runability     Example    When you download a media profile from the corporate web site  http   medi   aguide oce com  the file name can consist of the following information    lt printername gt _ lt IDnumber gt _ lt ColorlInfo gt _ lt Mediumname gt _ lt RIP gt _ lt version gt  omp    for example ColorWa
160. he operator to select the op   tion displayed in lower left corner of the screen    of the  Printer operator panel           3    Screen   see    The main screens on the printer operator  panel    on page 34        Chapter 2   Get to know the printing system 31    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The hardware of the Printer operator panel       Nr Component Description   Function    4 Status light       5  Upper left softkey       The status light indicates the status of the   printer    m A green light indicates that the printer is  ready    m A blinking green light indicates that the  printer is busy    m A red light can indicate the following     the printer is calibrating    the printer is not ready      an error occurred   m A blinking red light indicates that the  printer is busy and an error occurred     Key that allows the operator to select the op   tion displayed in upper left corner of the  screen of the    Printer operator panel           6  Upper right softkey       Key that allows the operator to select the op   tion displayed in upper right corner of the  screen of the    Printer operator panel           7    Confirmation key       Key that offers functionality that is compara    ble to left mouse button functionality  If the   operator presses this key  the user interface   object that has the focus is opened  executed   or confirmed    The operator can use this button  for example    to do the following    m open a setting     close and confirm t
161. he selected value of a  setting   m change the value of a setting   m start a wizard       8  Scroll wheel       9  Lower right softkey             32 Chapter 2   Get to know the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Wheel on the right side of the printer operator  panel  that allows the operator to   m scroll through the screen   m scroll through settings values    Key that allows the operator to select the op   tion displayed in lower right corner of the  screen of the  Printer operator panel           The hardware of the Printer operator panel       Component Description   Function       Green start key  The green key on the printer operator panel  that allows the operator to start a print job  from the  Queue  or a    Smart Inbox        11     Red stop key  The red key on the  Printer operator panel     B that allows the operator to immediately stop       the print job that is currently printed     Chapter 2   Get to know the printing system 33    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The main screens on the printer operator panel       The main screens on the printer operator panel        Screen Function                  The  Home  screen is the basic screen that displays only the  most relevant information  the condition of the system and  what it is doing now    Tasks  performed by    Any user           Monitor the system status     Note   The information in the  Home  screen is equivalent to  the system messages displayed in the  Sys
162. he system behavior regarding     m The  Media type    selection  m  The  Media size    selection    The  Media source    selection    The lists in    Media type    and  Media size    subsections display the media enabled on the  printer    In these lists  icons show      the media actually loaded on the printer     the empty rolls     the unavailable media   The size of the rolls  the size of the standard sheets and the type of media displayed in  the lists are the sizes enabled on the printer  they can be actually loaded or not on the  printer       Media type    selection    Define the  Media type    selection criteria         Request media type    Select from the list the media  type and size  to be used by  default   If the selected media is not found when a document is  added to a job  the system displays a warning  You can then  edit the file and select another  Media type    before printing           Prefer media type    Select from the list the media  type and size  to be used if  available   If the media of the selected type and of a correct size is not  found when a document is added to a job  the system pro   poses another media of the correct size  of any other type         Use any Media Type       The system proposes a media of the correct size  of any  type            Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 239    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the default behaviour for the media selection        i     Note   When the template refers to a m
163. he wizard to complete  the installation of the printer    For more information about specific steps please refer  to the following sections       Load or replace a toner cartridge    on page 64      Replace the maintenance tray    on page 67    If the toner cartridges are placed correctly  the following  message is displayed     Warming up         This procedure takes several minutes        After warming up  open media drawer 1      Load the supplied installation media on roll 1    see    Load a media roll    on page 74  a     i  Note   Only roll position 1 can be used for calibra   tions  You must use a 42 inch media roll      i  Note   Use Oc    Media  for reliable calibrations   LFMogo  42 inch         Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started 59    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Run the installation wizard from the printer operator panel       Illustration    The printer will do the calibration automatically  You  do not need to keep this printed calibration chart     Note   The calibration will take a several minutes     The printed output is lead through the slot  below the  Top back cover        External output     back          The following message in the  Home  screen is dis     played    Ready to print        Continue with the following procedure      Complete the printer configuration in the Oc   Express    WebTools    on page 80        60 Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From Manual
164. his field displays one of the following license types   m    Resale      a    Demo       Duration in days  This field displays the time your license is valid    License number  This field displays a license number        106 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Save the currently active licenses       Save the currently active licenses    Introduction    You can save all current active licenses of different licenses types into one single file     Purpose  Save the current active licenses for the following purposes     m Collect and save all active licenses of different types into one single file  m Create a back up file before you start a license activation job     When to do    Save the current active licenses before you start a license activation job or to save the  current license situation     How to save the license information    1  Click  Support     Licenses  to display the license information page   2  You need to log on as System administrator or Power user if you are not logged on already   3  Click the  Save  button   The  Save licenses    window opens   4  Select a directory  enter the file name and click the  Save  button to back up the currently  active licenses     Result    All currently active resale and demo licenses are stored into one single file     Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 107    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Install a new license       Install a new license    Int
165. history    tab to get an overview of the consumables  used per printed job    The table below gives an overview of the    Counter history    functionality that you can  access to sort  group  save or print the information you need     A Attention   To access the  Counter history    functionality you must log on as a Key operator or as a  System administrator        Counter history    functionality              Functionali   ty  Set counter   Select a    Counter history of value from the drop down list in the  history peri    header of the counter history list  You can select a value between  today        Description        od  and  6 days  or between  1 week  and  12 weeks      The counter history list displays the consumables used per print job  of all print jobs that are printed during the selected period of time          You can click on the column headers of the counter history list     Job  name        Job owner      Smart Inbox   Time Printed      B amp  W TAC    or     Color TAC    in the first window or    Length      Area  or  C     M   Y   K   toner usage in the second window  to sort the list according to your  needs     Sort the  counter his   tory list                  Select  List view  if you want to display all jobs that are printed in the  selected period  sorted according to your sort criterion     Display  method of    the counter                Select  Group view  if you want to display only the groups of your sort   history list  fe 8 f  criterion in the 
166. ia drawer   To load new media on the printer  the opera   tor must proceed as follows  m place the new media roll temporarily on    the roll loading station   insert the roll holder into the new media  roll   place the roll holder with the new media  roll in the correct roll position     Roll loader     optional  Helps the operator to load a media roll        Chapter 2   Get to know the printing system 29    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The    Imaging section       The    Imaging section    Illustration        15  When you open the  Top cover    you get access to the    Imaging section        Component   function table           Nr Component Description   Function     Print surface        Imaging devices          Imaging carriage              The print surface is designed to keep the me   dia that is printed on flat               The 8 Imaging devices jet the toner on the  media        Carriage that contains the 8 imaging devices    30 Chapter 2   Get to know the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The hardware of the Printer operator panel    The printer operator panel    The hardware of the Printer operator panel    Illustration       Component   function table    Component Description   Function     Numeric keys  Keys with the numeric values 0 9 in the lower  part of the  Printer operator panel     that allow  the operator to enter a numeric value  for ex   ample the number of prints      Lower left softkey    Key that allows t
167. ia roll       70 Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The  Media drawer       Nr Component     Roll loading station       Description   Function    Groove integrated behind the front cover of  the media drawer    To load new media on the printer  the opera   tor must proceed as follows   m place the new media roll temporarily on    the roll loading station   insert the roll holder into the new media  roll   place the roll holder with the new media  roll in the correct roll position     Roll loader     optional  Helps the operator to load a media roll        Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    71    Unpack a media roll       Unpack a media roll    How to unpack a media roll    Attention   A Handle the media roll with care  A dented media roll can damage the imaging devices     Attention    A Please note down the media code  for example LFMogo  indicated on the sticker on the  media box  You need this code to select the correct media type on the printer operator  panel     Attention    A Always write the correct media name and media code inside the core  after you unpack  the media roll  In that case  if you replace a media roll before it is empty and you want  to re use it later  you will have the correct media information available     Action Illustration       1 Place the media box on a table    and open it           lt _   
168. ic     for  graphics     Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 367    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Photo    Photo       The advised settings    You can also find an overview of the advised settings on the Quality Reference Chart  This chart gives an overview of the different types of print files and the print settings and  color management settings that give the best output result for these print files    The Quality Reference Chart is available as a demo print on the printer operator panel    see    How to print the Quality Reference Chart    on page 355      i  Note     For optimal print quality please verify that the name of the loaded media corresponds  with the media name on the printer operator panel     Setting Advised value Advised rendering intent  value     Print Setting     Oc   Print Assistant             Color feel     Oc   enhanced colors       Perceptual  photo      368 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Photo realistic impression       Photo realistic impression       The advised settings    You can also find an overview of the advised settings on the Quality Reference Chart  This chart gives an overview of the different types of print files and the print settings and  color management settings that give the best output result for these print files    The Quality Reference Chart is available as a demo print on the printer operator panel    see    How to print the Quality
169. if the media you select does not support folding  an error  message is displayed  You must select a foldable media  type and size  or disable the    folding option to be able to print the job      Media information     According to the media selected and the printer capabilities  the  Media information    in   dicates the  Media source    to be used and the  Media orientation    to be used     Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 267    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Advanced     Layout  settings        Advanced     Layout  settings    Introduction    You can define the layout of the image on the media     Illustration    uo     Coe a       hetest n  seme tt    Craan st Da p e ta nata      aiman  meus I  meng apte m ts to pre ne of Da toti partaga  AS 4 280 gom 04 an et tg ar Oe maa te sea neta    we    ageer    myos PN  re map a te seteia poe aby sha aaga ero  mae Pe map on te sese    wna J        Ant agoen           Scale factor     Define the  Scale factor    if the image must be scaled on the printout  Select                     1 1 Scale    to keep the original image size       Custom scale    to define a custom scale value  the scale range depends on  the printer     Reduce to fit    for an  Automatic scale down when image is larger than  media         Scale to fit    for an    Automatic scale to the media size             Orientation of the image on the media       You can change the image orientation on the media by selecting either     268 Cha
170. in the print file  select the    Add margins  around the image    option    This option adds an additional margin to each side of the print content in order to avoid  cropping  It increases the size of the output    Check the result in the Print Preview    and adjust the media size in case of cropping   You can configure the size of these added margins in the printer configuration tool  from  3mm  default  up to 5mm  0 12 to 0 19 inch      It is recommended to select this option when    m the content of the print file covers 100  of the file  no border  and the size of the  image is the same as the size of the selected media    m the content of the print file covers 100  of the file  no border  and the image is  smaller than the selected media     270 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Advanced       Rendering    settings        Advanced     Rendering  settings    Introduction    You can tune the color settings and rendering options     Note    Li  For Oc   Publisher Copy it is advised to define the following color settings   m    Color mode      Oc   enhanced colors        RGB input data      sRGB     m    Rendering intent        Relative colorimetric       Illustration        Cohen no  Dorma  Car  Cohen tosi Perta y otr tee     Cnet  coas teat  S  Oct artarced caire  Pesstrat cote Na       Prt mode sret astut                   Color mode       Define whether the document is printed in  Color  or in    Grayscale    
171. ings that are commonly used in the USA  m or settings that are commonly used in the rest of the world     4  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or  Cancel  to reject your entries     Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 119    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Define the display languages of the printer       Define the display languages of the printer    Introduction    The Oc   Express WebTools allows you to define the  First language     the default display  language  and the    Second language     the alternative display language  for the printer  operator panel     The  First language    and the    Second language    you defined in the Oc   Express WebTools  are also the display languages that are available on the printer operator panel  You can  toggle between these two languages using the operator panel     Before you begin    Access the Oc   Express WebTools  This setting can be edited by the key operator and  the system manager     How to define the default and the alternative display languages in the Oc   Express  WebTools    1  Select  Preferences     System properties         Regional settings      2  Click the value for  First language      or    Click  Edit    in the  Regional settings    bar to access a window for all regional settings   4  Select the first display language that you can choose for the operator panel from the drop  down list     we    5  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or    Cancel    to reject your entries   6  Repeat the sa
172. inting system 141    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the Color management settings                   Input file type Color feel  Oc   enhanced colors          Color management    Oc   enhanced colors     gives      RGB input data    settings for PostScript   access to enhanced color  sRGB    and PDF files    settings  a CMYK input data    Euroscale coated        Rendering intent   Per     ceptual  photo         142 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Chapter 5  Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The    Media drawer       Work with the Oc   ColorWave 600  printer    Set up the printer  The  Media drawer       Illustration       Component   function table       Attention   A Only use intact media rolls  Dented media rolls can damage the  Imaging devices        Nr Component Description   Function    Media roll 3 or 5 in other media drawers    Media roll 4 or 6 in other media drawers       144 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The  Media drawer          Nr   Component Description   Function     Roll holder  Carries the media roll     Roll loading station    Groove integrated behind the front cover of  the media drawer   To load new media on the printer  the opera   tor must proceed as follows    place the new media roll temporarily on  the roll loading station    insert the roll holder into the new media  roll   place th
173. ion Plus  setting    1  Click  Preferences     Print job defaults       2  Click  Edit  in the    Basic    bar or click the value of the  Production Plus  setting    3  Select Production    for regular prints   Select    Production Plus    if prints that are printed with the    Production    print setting show  print artefacts that you want to reduce    4  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or  Cancel  to reject your entries     Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 321    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the    Economy monochrome enhanced  setting       Set the    Economy monochrome enhanced  setting    Introduction    You can use the  Economy monochrome enhanced setting in the Oc   Express WebTools  to define how the Oc   ColorWave 600 must interpret the  Economy   Print Setting        Before you begin    This setting is editable for the Key operator or Power user     How to set the  Economy monochrome enhanced  setting    1  Click  Preferences     Print job defaults       2  Click    Edit    in the  Basic    bar or click the value of the  Economy monochrome enhanced     setting    3  Select  Enabled  if color toner must be used to create darker lines and areas for grayscale  prints printed with the  Economy   Print Setting     This will also result in a higher toner  usage    Select  Disabled  if you always want to use the regular  Economy   Print Setting       4  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or    Cancel    to reject your entries     322 
174. is displayed   The printer operator panel now displays the status  Rebooting      During the reboot  procedure the new software is installed     Attention   A Again  you must wait approximately 15 minutes  Do not touch anything     9  The message in the window above disappears when the software update is finished   You can now click  OK  to return to the Oc   Express WebTools     Result    Your software update is finished     Note   Li  There is no specific user feedback on the result of the software update  Please check the  current software version of your system in the  Support     Update  tab     Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 103    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Shut down or restart the system       Shut down or restart the system    To remotely shut down the printing system you can click  Shut down    in the  Support   tab     When the printing system is on  you can also use this button to restart the system     104 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Check your licenses       Check your licenses    About the licenses    The    Support       Licenses  tab in the Oc   Express WebTools allows you to manage the  licenses that are active on your system  A license is needed to activate certain functions  on your Oc   ColorWave 600     You can use the    Support       Licenses  tab to perform the following tasks     View the current active licenses   m Get the host id of the Oc   system   m Save
175. isible from your place of work     Open the  Front cover   6  of the Oc   ColorWave 600 and locate the serial number of    the printer   You can find the serial number on the barcode sticker next to the modification sticker     Write down the printer serial number   495000XXX   You need the serial number to complete the installation wizard     Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started 55    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Run the installation wizard from the printer operator panel       How to run the installation wizard    Action Illustration    If you connect the network cable to your company  network and you switch on your Oc   ColorWave 600  for the first time  an installation wizard starts automat   ically    Use the  Upper right softkey    to go to the next step     Use the    Scroll wheel    to select the correct language for  your printer user interface     Use the    Upper right softkey    to go to the next step     Select Tee levpuege ty ane    Use the    Scroll wheel    to confirm your language selec   tion     Ade pins tare you waht to select    Use the    Upper right softkey    to go to the next step  wi Teste    tagist  US    Use the  Numeric keys    to enter the serial number of  the printer  You can find the serial number behind the     Front cover  on the right hand side    Use the    Upper right softkey    to go to the next step     Note   To change or replace the last digit  select the   Red stop key    to delete the last
176. istrator or Power user    3  Browse the network and select the license file    4  Click  Ok  to start the activation of the license file  A message is displayed when the process  is completed    5  Restart the system to activate the changes     Chapter 9   License management 397    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Install a new license       Result    m Ifyou have updated an expired license  the new license file overwrites the previous li   cense file    m Ifyou have uploaded a new license  the license state in the overview is changed from   Not authorized    to    Authorized        mSave the currently active licenses  on page 396    398 Chapter 9   License management    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Appendix A  Specifications of the Oc    ColorWave 600    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Specifications    Oc   PowerM controller   Oc   PowerM Plus controller         Specifications    Oc   PowerM controller     Oc   PowerM Plus    controller       Oc   PowerM controller    hardware                                        1  For an average file size of 200 Mb per Ao        Topic    Oc   PowerM con     Oc   PowerM Plus  troller    controller     standard embedded  high end embedded  controller  controller    Hardware Processor Celeron D 440  Con    E6400 2 13 GHz Core  roe  2 0 GHz 2 Duo   Memory DRAM 1 Gb DRAM 2Gb  Hard Disk 1 x 80 Gb 1x 160 Gb   1 x 320  Gb   Hard Disk Spool 30 Gb 270 Gb   configuration Ripped files 30 Gb 80 Gb   Best f
177. it Suited for a printing Suited for a Job print   environment with regu    ing environment  low   lar   average files 70    ers the load on the serv   of files ripped faster er  handles complex  than printing speed  files   rotation with   speed    Long plots 15m 50m   Number of plots in queue  150 m  1350 m     Stored on disk    Complex files   20  faster   Rotation   Scaling 20   50  faster       Platform    Standard interface    Oc   controller with real time OS    10 100 1000Base T with RJ45       Network protocols    TCP IP  FTP  LPD          Applicable software        Oc   PowerM controller    software       400 Appendix A   Specifications of the Oc   ColorWave 600    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals          Specifications  Oc   PowerM controller     Oc   PowerM Plus controller          Oc   PowerM controller    software          Basic functions File spooling on the controller   Concurrent receiving  processing and printing of  digital jobs    Basic application    Oc   Express WebTools     m Media manager  m Licenses  m Queue Manager       Print processing technology  Oc   CrystalPoint      technology        Number of prints 1 999  Set memory  send once  process once  print many       Roll selection and switching   Manual  m Automatic       Rotation  Scaling    Positioning    Print manipulation    Pen management  Trailing strip adjustment  add up to 400 mm       Color modes Grayscale    Color       Quality modes m    Set the Print Setting    on page 317      
178. ith a print length up to  175 meters  To be able to print very long prints  the print quality may be less than the  print quality that you defined for your print job     Before you begin    This setting is editable for the Key operator or Power user     Attention   A The    Long plot mode  setting does not apply for PDF or PostScript files     How to set the    Long plot mode     1  Click  Configuration     Printer setup       2  Click  Edit    in the  Printer languages  bar or click the value of the  Long plot mode  setting   3  Select the correct value    4  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or    Cancel    to reject your entries     326 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the    Automatic roll switch          Set the    Automatic roll switch       Introduction    You can choose one of following values    m    Enabled     Select this value if you have two or more media rolls that contain identical media  the  same media type and media size   In that case  the printer can automatically switch  to an alternative media roll when a roll runs out of media and continue printing    a    Disabled     Select this value if all media rolls contain different media types or media sizes   There are two options   If you select a specific roll number for your print job and the selected media roll runs  out of media  the printing process stops   If you did not select a specific roll number for your print job  but only a medi
179. k settings manually    on page 61                      The following message is displayed    Auto network discovery in progress                The printer operator panel now displays the network  settings    Record the IP address  for example  134 188 26 173    You need this IP address to access the  Oc   Express  WebTools    later in order to complete the printer con         nag        P address     Sunset mesi    Gateway     ores        figuration   Use the  Upper right softkey    to finish the network in   stallation procedure                         134 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Configure the network settings on the printer operator panel       Action Illustration    When you are ready and have left the wizard  the sys   tem indicates if you have to restart the controller of   the Oc   ColorWave 600 printer to apply the new net   work settings  This can  for example  be the case when    settings are received through DHCP  When no indica   tion appears  you do not need to restart the controller        Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 135    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the default print job settings       Configure print jobs  Relevant settings in the Oc   Express WebTools  Set the default print job settings    Definition  You can use the Oc   Express WebTools to configure the default values for the print job  settings  The print job settings are grouped under the  Preferences   
180. l 180   rota   tion    if the print productivity is an important factor    Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or  Cancel    to reject your entries     The output will be printed with minimal waste of media  In most cases this means that  the output will be printed in landscape orientation  provided the output fits on the media  in this orientation     330 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the    Alignment    mode       Set the    Alignment    mode    Introduction    You can optimize the print productivity by reducing the distance the print carriage needs  to travel to print the output  To do so you can align the image to the top right hand  corner of the sheet     You can choose the following alignment settings        Alignment    mode    Before you begin       This setting is editable for the Key operator or Power user     How to set the alignment mode    1  Click  Preferences     Print job defaults       2  Click  Edit  in the Layout    bar or click the value of the    Alignment    setting   3  Select  Top right    if the print productivity is the most important factor    4  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or  Cancel  to reject your entries     Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 331    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    What is Color management        Color Management    What is Color management     Definition  The color management settings help you to reproduce the colors of you
181. l Oc   representative  To avoid potential hazards  maintenance is strictly  preserved to properly qualified and trained service technicians     Sustainability Information    Oc   is focused on creating value for all stakeholders by realizing profitable  sustainable  growth  The Oc   strategy is aimed at optimizing business processes  strengthening its  product portfolio and boosting distribution power  Sustainability underpins these strategic  aims  A strong performance in sustainability contributes to operational efficiency as well  as generating stronger product propositions and a more powerful market image  It is no  coincidence that Oc   embraced sustainability as part of its core proposition decades ago   You can find more information about the sustainability policy of Oc   via www sustain   ability oce com     Chapter 1   Introduction 13    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Available documentation       Available documentation    Introduction    This manual is part ofa complete documentation set  The following table shows a complete  overview of the available documentation     Available documentation Oc   ColorWave 600    Documentation Availability    User manual   Operating information     On www oce com  Available as a PDF file in multiple lan   guages    a On CD ROM  Available as an online document and as a  PDF file in multiple languages     User manual   Safety information m On www oce com  Available as a PDF file in multiple lan   guages    User manual
182. lack  In additive mixing  the RGB colours are the pri   mary colours and cyan  magenta  and yellow  CMY  are the secondary colours            CMYK  Colours you print   The CMYK colour space is based on the CMYK colour model  The CMYK  Cyan   Magenta  Yellow and Black colour space is a subtractive colour space  where you can  mix colours based on subtracting light energy from the spectrum  The CMY toners  are used to create RGB colours  All three inks are required to produce black and the  absence of all three produces white  In subtractive colour mixing the CMY colours  are the primary colours and RGB are the secondary colours     Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 333    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    What is an input profile   standardization           You can define the input profile if you use the  Color feel    setting  Oc   enhanced colors      The table below gives an overview of the possible input profiles   standardisation settings         Input profile   standardis    Description    ation  RGB    sRGB                    Use this setting to indicate the colour space of a standard  computer monitor  sRGB is the most frequently used  RGB colour space  especially in consumer grade digital  cameras  sRGB is acceptable for most consumer applica   tions  The sRGB design allows easy previewing on a  standard computer display        RGB    AdobeRGB  This setting indicates an RGB colour space developed  by Adobe in 1998  Adobe RGB has a larger gam
183. le  LFMogo   You can find the media code of the new media roll on the sticker on media  box  The media code represents a specific media profile that the Oc   ColorWave 600  uses to optimize the printed output for the corresponding media type  If the correct media  code is not available on your printer operator panel  you must first make a new media  profile available on the printer operator panel   see Make a new media profile available  on the printer operator panel    on page 161     Attention    When you unpack a media roll  always write the correct media name and media code  inside the core  In that case  if you replace a media roll before it is empty and you want  to re use the media roll later  you will have the correct media information available     Caution   Watch your fingers when you handle the media roll     Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system 295    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load a media roll    Action Illustration    Open the correct media drawer  to load the new media roll     Place the new media roll on the  roll loading station     Pull the handle of the roll holder    locking mechanism towards you           296 Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Load a media roll    Action Illustration    Slide the roll holder in the core    of the new media roll     Align the roll with the correct   size indicator on the roll holder   At the
184. le failure in the run is detected  and compensated         Dimensions    2100 mm x 893 mm x 1575 mm  W x Dx H        Voltage    100 120   240 V       Frequency    Power con   sumption    50 60 Hz    Off  0 15 W  Energy save  185 W  Ready  270 W  Active  450 W    EPA energy star     Sleep mode 69 W  Total system        Weight    Safety ap     provals    195 kg with 1 drawer  235 kg with 2 drawers  275 kg with 3 drawers       T  V GS  CETECOM  CE  UL   c UL  CB  FCC Class A       Other       m Maintenance cassette     EPA Energy Star   compliant    No ozone emission   a No odor   m  Oc   TonerPearls                longer lengths can be printed without guarantee for the side margins     Ergomonic advise    Multiple front loadable rolls   Multi roll media feeding  1   6 rolls  Free configurable      Appendix A   Specifications of the Oc   ColorWave 600 405    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Specifications Oc   ColorWave 600 printer      Maximum load weight    per position     357  Media drawer that contains the media roll 1  and or 2          Roll   Maximum load weight  per position     358  Media drawer that contains the media roll 3  and or 4           406 Appendix A   Specifications of the Oc   ColorWave 600    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Specifications Oc   ColorWave 600 printer    Maximum load weight  per position    10 kg    5 kg     359  Media drawer that contains the media roll 5  and or 6           Appendix A   Specifications of the Oc   C
185. licenses are stored into one single file     396 Chapter 9   License management    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Install a new license       Install a new license    Introduction    The Oc   applications and optional functions are protected against unauthorized use  You  need to activate the license to enable an application or optional function for use  The   Licenses  tab enables you to upload new license files to activate a license     Purpose    m Upload a new license file   m Extend the existing license on your Oc   ColorWave 600     Note   Li  After the license is uploaded you must restart your system to activate the license file     How to get a new license file    1  Click  Support     Licenses  to display the license information page    2  The login window appears  Log on as System administrator or Power user    3  Click the host id hyperlink to display the host id information    4  Copy the id and send the host id information to your Oc   representative together with  a list of options that you require    5  After receiving the license file s   store the file s  on the network     Attention    A It is advised to store the license information of the currently active license files in a back   up file before you activate a new license file  Use the  Save  button to store the current  license files information     Upload a new license    1  Click  Activate  to open a browser window to search for the license file on the network    2  Log on as System admin
186. ll can damage the imaging devices     Attention   A Please note down the media code  for example LFMogo  indicated on the sticker on the  media box  You need this code to select the correct media type on the printer operator    panel     Attention   A Always write the correct media name and media code inside the core  after you unpack  the media roll  In that case  if you replace a media roll before it is empty and you want    to re use it later  you will have the correct media information available     Action    Illustration       1 Place the media box on a table  and open it                 148 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Unpack the media roll    Illustration    Remove the plug from the media  roll     Carefully remove the media roll  from the box        4 Remove the other plug and  plastic around the media roll     Chapter 5   Use the printing system 149    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load a media roll       Load a media roll    How to load a media roll    A    A    A    150    Attention   Do not use dented media rolls to prevent damage to the imaging devices     Attention   Do not open the media drawer during the print process  When the last print is delivered   wait 10 seconds before you open the media drawer     Attention   Do not open more than one media drawer at the same time to prevent overbalance of  the printer     Attention    It is very important to select the media type with the correct 
187. lor management settings for TIFF and JPEG files     RGB input           Color management settings for TIFF and JPEG files     RGB  input     The default settings are emphasized     Input profile Color Management settings                 Input da    Standardization    Color feel    Rendering intent  ta    RGB a  sRGB   m  AdobeRGB     CMYK m  Euroscale coat     Oc   enhanced colors   Perceptual  pho              Oc   CAD colours          ed  to        Euroscale un  m    Saturation  business  coated    graphics       a  US Web coat       Absolute colorimet   ed  SWOP   ric      a  US Web un       Relative colorimet   coated    ric        Simulated Oc   TCS400 CAD colors                Simulated non Oc   printer  vivid colors          Simulated non Oc   printer  match screen colors                   Simulated non Oc   printer  no color correction                      None  managed by application         The output quality ofa simulated non Oc   printer setting depends on the selected input  profile for simulated printers  Make sure you use the correct input profile for simulated  printers     Oc   ColorWave 600 path  Support   Input profiles     350 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Color management settings for TIFF and JPEG files   CMYK input         Color management settings for TIFF and JPEG files     CMYK  input     The default settings are emphasized     Input profile Color Management settings    Input da  
188. m  800x1189 mm  Ao   A1  A2  A3  Bo  E     Custom   Note     You cannot disable media sizes that are currently loaded on the printer     Note    When you load a media roll the printer automatically detects the roll width  If the detected  roll width is not a standard width  the printer selects the next smaller roll width that is  supported by the printer      i  Note     When you load a media roll with a size that was not yet enabled in the media series  the  system automatically adds the new media size to the custom media series     4  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or    Cancel    to reject your entries     126 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Configure the network settings in the Oc   Express WebTools       The    Configuration    tab in the Oc   Express  WebTools    Configure the network settings in the Oc   Express WebTools    Introduction    Some of the network settings are configured during the installation of your system  If  you want to change the initial configuration or if you want to define more network settings   you can do so in the  Configuration    tab     How to configure the network settings in the Oc   Express WebTools    1  Click  Configuration       Connectivity       2  Click  Edit  in the group bar to access the  Edit  window  You can edit all the settings of  the settings group in one window   or   3  To edit only one setting  click a single setting value in the expanded list      i  Note   
189. m 215    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Pause  resume or delete an active job       Control print jobs    Pause  resume or delete an active job    Introduction    This section describes how to pause  resume or delete an active job     How to    Pause    or    Resume    an active print job    Action   Remarks    To pause the printer    In the  Queue  screen use the  Lower left softkey    key on the   printer operator panel to pause the printer    The following message is displayed    m    Printer pause requested      m    The printer stops after this page     if the printer was busy  printing     In the  Queue  screen use the    Lower right softkey    to  Re   sume    the printer        216 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Pause  resume or delete an active job       How to delete an active print job    If you use the Then Result    Printer operator   Press the  Red stop key    The system aborts and deletes  panel the job immediately     Oc   Express m Open the    Jobs    tab    WebTools m Inthe    Jobs   Queue    sec   tion place a checkmark in  front of the job you want  to delete and click  Delete              Chapter 5   Use the printing system 217    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Clear the system       Clear the system    When to do    If you want to remove all the jobs from the system     How to clear the system    Illustration    From the  Home  screen on the printer operator panel  sel
190. m reQuireMents          ccccccceeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeenaeeees 92  Set another language for the Oc   Express WebTOooI             000068 94  How to    dit a S ttinG   c cicsee vivesievelie die aotan aiaiai 96  View and check the SettingS             ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 97  Save the settings in a file    cece eee eeeee cece eee eeeaeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeenees 98  Load the settings from a fil         esceeeeeceecteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeesaees 99  Restore the factory Gefaullts           ccccssscsssssessssnecnseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseess 101  Update the Oc   ColorWave 600 Software        ccccccccsccssssssseeseeeeeeees 102  Shut down or restart the SYStOM         ccccccceeeeessseseeseeessneaneeeeeeeeeeeess 104  CHECK your Cense Saena a ainiai ada aN 105  Save the currently active liCENSES            ccsesceeseeeeseessssnneeaseeeeceeeeeess 107  Install A NEW JiCONSE       cccccccccceeceeeeeceeessseesseeesceeesueeeeaueeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 108  SG CUT ILY seau a a ena na aan aha eaaa a aaaea ENEE 110  Access and PASSWOLMCG           cceseeeseesensenneeeaueeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeesessseeeees 110  User roles and authorizations            ccccceceeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 110  Log in aS an authorized USEM        ee eee eeeeeee cee eeeeeeeeee ee eeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 112  Log out after Your SCSSION         cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 113  Change the password for authorized USELS             cceseeeeeeeenees 114  E Sh
191. me steps to define a second display language for the operator panel     120 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Configure the  Media request time out          Configure the    Media request time out       Introduction    The printer operator panel displays a media request when a media is requested that is not   available on the printer    m When the  Media request time out    setting is disabled  the media request will be dis   played on the printer operator panel until it is resolved    m When the  Media request time out  setting is enabled  default   you can enter a media  request time out value in seconds  If the media request is not resolved within the media  request time out period  the  Action after media request time out  setting determines  if the printer either deletes the job from the job queue or puts the job in attention  state     When to do    Enable the  Media request time out    setting if print productivity is an important factor     How to configure the  Media request time out       1  Click  Preferences       System properties       2  Click  Edit  in the  Printer properties    bar or click the value of the  Media request time   out  setting    3  When you enable the setting  you must enter a time period as well  If you choose to disable  the setting  the time period will not be adjustable    4  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or  Cancel  to reject your entries     How to configure the    Action afte
192. media code  for example  LFMogo   You can find the media code of the new media roll on the sticker on media  box  The media code represents a specific media profile that the Oc   ColorWave 600  uses to optimize the printed output for the corresponding media type  If the correct media  code is not available on your printer operator panel  you must first make a new media  profile available on the printer operator panel   see Make a new media profile available  on the printer operator panel    on page 161     Attention    When you unpack a media roll  always write the correct media name and media code  inside the core  In that case  if you replace a media roll before it is empty and you want  to re use the media roll later  you will have the correct media information available     Caution   Watch your fingers when you handle the media roll     Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load a media roll    Action Illustration    Open the correct media drawer  to load the new media roll     Place the new media roll on the  roll loading station     Pull the handle of the roll holder    locking mechanism towards you        Chapter 5   Use the printing system 151    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load a media roll    Action Illustration    Slide the roll holder in the core    of the new media roll     Align the roll with the correct   size indicator on the roll holder   At the left and right hand side    Release the handle of 
193. media rolls on the printer with different media sizes and the  same media types   2 Use the  Landscape  orientation to print a job on a media size that is one size  smaller than the media defined on the system  For example  A1 prints in    landscape on Ao and A2 prints in landscape on A1  You are not required to  cut the media by hand     Use the    Auto rotate landscape    setting or the  Auto rotate landscape with  additional 180   rotation    in the Oc   Express WebTools or the job submission  tools to rotate the orientation automatically        Note   Li  The above procedure is based on DIN media sizes  You can also use this procedure with  ANSI media sizes     When productivity is the only important requirement     1 Load and define two or more media rolls on the printer with the same media  sizes and the same media types   Note   When roll 1 is empty  the printer switches automatically to roll 2        Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system 307    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Laminate the media       Laminate the media    Introduction    For durability or protection purposes you can decide to laminate your printed output     Please refer to the specific white paper for laminating Oc   ColorWave 600 prints to find  an overview of the advised Oc   Laminates and the advised settings for your laminating  device     308 Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals
194. n overview of every    Smart Inbox    that currently contains one or  more print jobs  You can select a print job in the Smart Inbox and use the buttons on  top of the Smart Inbox section to print  edit or delete the job   When you click    Open Smart Inbox  you can create a new Smart Inbox that immedi   ately appears in the Smart Inbox section   If you click    Delete all    in the  View all    Smart Inbox all jobs are deleted from all Smart  Inboxes     Note   Li  The  View all  Smart Inbox is only available if you enable the  Preferences     System  properties       Job management       Display a view on all Smart Inbox jobs  setting        Preferences    tab    Editable for Key operator and Power user   see    User roles and authorizations   on page 110     The    Preferences    tab contains the default settings to fine tune the system to optimally fit  your company s workflow and processes        Preferences    m    Overview    Summary of the settings organised in different groups      System properties     m    Print job defaults             Configuration    tab    Editable for System administrator and Power user   see    User roles and authorizations    on  page 110     Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 89    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Purpose of the Oc   Express WebTools       The    Configuration    tab contains the settings to install the system in your infrastructure   according to your standards  These settings are configured during inst
195. n overview of the relation between the job submission method   the file type and the color management settings    Job submission File type Color management settings       method    Oc   Windows   Printer   The driver converts all   You can define the color settings   Driver files into HP GL 2 in    m The printer driver    m The Oc   Express WebTools   by choosing the printer s de   fault in the driver settings    m The application  by choosing  the setting    None  managed  by application    in the driver                Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 345    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Color management settings and job submission          Job submission File type Color management settings  method  LPR FTP The documents are sent   Depending on the file type of  to the printer without   the job  the default settings of  being converted to an    one of the 3 file type paths is  other file type  used in the Oc   Express  The controller recog  WebTools when there is no em   nizes the following file   bedded color profile present in  types  the file  Use the Oc   Express  a Vector  HP GL  WebTools to adjust the color  HP GL 2  Cal  settings for the print job   Comp    Raster  TIFF  JPEG   CALS  NIRS  C4  m PostScript PDF          346 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Priorities in the color management settings       Priorities in the color management settings    When you want to print
196. n the  wizard     Note    Please note that the   Maintenance tray  drawer    is located at the  rear side of the Oc    ColorWave 600 printer   Push the    Maintenance  tray drawer    to open it     Pull the  Maintenance tray  drawer    open        Lift the old maintenance tray  out                 166 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Replace the maintenance tray    Illustration    Place the empty maintenance  tray     Push the  Maintenance tray  drawer    shut     When the new maintenance tray  is placed correctly  press  Finish   on the  Printer operator panel    Minbar meh ag anina    Mabe pre te clone the erawer      Press Fon to conte  to continue        Chapter 5   Use the printing system 167    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The system monitor and the system states       Monitor the printer    The system monitor and the system states    Introduction    You can activate the system monitor to get an overview of the current status of the  printing system     How to activate the system monitor    If you use the   Then    Printer opera    From the  Home  screen select  System  with the  Lower left softkey      tor panel       If you use the   Then    Oc   Express Click on the  System  tab in the lower left corner of the screen  The  WebTools system monitor pops up        168 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The system monitor and the system states    If you 
197. ngs in the driver or  you can indicate to use the printer s default settings  Make sure the color  settings do not conflict with the color settings that may be set in another  stage of the process           Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 347    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Priorities in the color management settings       Stages in the process of making a color print Priority    The Oc   Express WebTools offers 3 default paths for color settings  4   based on the file type of the document         Color management settings for HP GL  HP GL 2 and HP RTL  files         Color management settings for HP GL  HP GL 2 and HP RTL files        on page 349        Color management settings for TIFF and JPEG files         Color management settings for TIFF and JPEG files   RGB input    on  page 350     Color management settings for TIFF and JPEG files   CMYK input      on page 351   m    Color management settings for PostScript and PDF files       Color management settings for PostScript and PDF files   RGB input      on page 352     Color management settings for PostScript and PDF files   CMYK input      on page 353   These settings are applied when the controller cannot recognize or detect   any color settings for the file to be printed              Note    Li  It is advised to align the color management settings that have been made in the different  stages before you start the print job  The color space of the document and the settings  for the print 
198. nnes 89  Configure  media request time OUt    s  sssssssssssierisreereereee 121  media sizes      eeceesseeeeeeee     125  281  HEEWOTK  SCCUNES  sr EER 80  network settings manually oo    eee 61  network settings on the printer operator panel  E E niacin 132  printer panel time out      as sossesnsvesesstoss 122  regional settings 0    eeeseeeeeseee 83  119  time out value of the energy save modes         123  Connect  mains supply cable sinrraneniicrnersionri 52       network cable  Connect to printer    Connect to iprittters  iscacscsasvssdasesvecsicencsinies 235  Connect to the network   Connect to the network wo    55  Consumables   Consumables  Fi sassse seeds css scsscescvssescasesvestesretesceen 22  Consumer graphics   advised settings       ccsesseseeeeteseeeeesesees 366  Controller   hardware specifications         ccceseeeseseeeeeees 400   software specifications occ ceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 401  Copy delivery tray   Copy delivery tray sc ssssesesesssstosseeistscorsiesstorsrse 38  Copy job   direct copy mode disabled 0    255   direct copy mode enabled       c eee 253  Copy template   For th    printer sicssosscosssscesiaseieseisess innra 236  Copy templates   For Oc   Publisher Copy       cceeeeeseeeseeeees 237  Core size   G  re SEn risaie adirar       media type  Counter history  Counter history sssississisrssisusisi isses iiseaesisrisnsosas 90  Create  Smat  NDOX  oiscsesteeiscosssesssesesecseasessessssvonsus  ess 200  427       Curling paper   Curling paper  rna
199. non and Oc   have joined forces to create the global  leader in the printing industry  For our customers  this  combines Canon and Oc   technology with the support  of the Oc   direct sales and service organizations  Look    to the new Canon Oc   combination for     e Enterprise printing in the office and corporate    printroom    e Large format printing of technical documentation   signage  and display graphics    e Production printing for marketing service bureaus and  graphic arts    e Business Services for document process outsourcing    For more information visit us at     www oce com    
200. nter properties    bar or click the value of the  Print while RIP    setting   3  Select the correct value   Select  Enabled  if print productivity is an important factor   4  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or  Cancel  to reject your entries     Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 329    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the  Rotation  mode       Set the    Rotation    mode    Introduction    The    Rotation    setting allows you to rotate the image according to predefined rotation  values or you can let the printer perform the rotation automatically     Choose one of the following values     No rotation      1 ol   90    180      270      1 P     Auto rotate portrait      Auto rotate landscape       Auto rotate portrait with additional 180   rotation        Auto rotate landscape with additional 180   rotation        Auto rotate media saving          Auto rotate media saving with additional 180   rotation       When to do    When you want to give preference to a productive print set up and an efficient use of  media configure the system for Auto rotate media saving     Before you begin    This setting is editable for the Key operator or Power user     How to set the rotation mode    1   2     3     Result    Click  Preferences    Print job defaults       Click  Edit  in the  Layout  bar or click the value of the    Rotation    setting    Select the correct value    Select  Auto rotate media saving    or  Auto rotate media saving with additiona
201. nuals    Configure the network settings on the printer operator panel       Illustration    Use the scroll wheel to select  Network settings    and  press the confirmation key     The printer operator panel displays the current network  settings  To change these settings press  begin    lower  right softkey   to start the network connection proce   dure     The following message is displayed    This wizard assists you to connect the printer to the  network     Hey bate ye nt anata    This werd asetets    Use the    Upper right softkey    to go to the next step        Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 133    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Configure the network settings on the printer operator panel           Action Illustration       Select one of the following options   a    Auto detect  IPv4 only      Use the  Scroll wheel    to select    Auto detect  IPv4  only   if the system must automatically detect your        network settings  Confirm your entry with the     Confirmation key  above the    Scroll wheel      Use the    Upper right softkey    to go to next step and  continue with step 9    m    Manual     Use the  Scroll wheel    to select  Manual  if you want  to configure the network settings manually  Con   firm your entry with the  Confirmation key  above  the    Scroll wheel      Use the  Upper right softkey    to go to the next step   You must now first follow the procedure to enter  the network settings manually   see    Configure the  networ
202. ny   You can modify the parameters if needed      i  Note     The availability of parameters depends on the format      Image Orientation       Define the reading orientation of the original image  You can       Keep the default setting   Match CAD standard    to orient the image according to the  selected standard    m Manually select the  Reading orientation         Landscape   when the long edge of the image is the top of the image     Portrait   when the short edge of the image is the top of the image   m Use the rotation as it was saved in the original image by selecting  No rotation  as in    file      If needed  check the  Add a 180 degrees extra rotation    box to rotate the image by 180  degrees   This option can be used with any of the orientation values     Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 259    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the    Image Properties           Legend position     When you set    Automatic detection of the legend  in the default template  the system  analyzes the image to find the location of the legend  within the  Timeout  limits   It  shows the selected corner in the  Image Orientation    preview   When needed  adjust the    Legend position    to get the legend on top of the folded packet   in case of folding  You can       Keep the default setting     Match CAD standard    to place the legend according to the  selected standard      DIN   legend located at the bottom right of the image     ERICSSON   legend located a
203. o the folder   The  Delivery destination    is automatically set to  Folded delivery        Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 263    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Basic    settings       Note   Li  Some media types cannot be delivered to the  Top Delivery Tray  TDT   or to the  folder     A media from a roll wider than 36 inches cannot be delivered to the folder        General     Enter the number of copies of the document to print  between 1 and 999     Copy count         264 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Advanced       Media    settings        Advanced       Media    settings    Introduction  For each scanned original in the job  the system automatically selects the most appropriate    media to be used for printing  according to     m Automatically applies the default print settings defined in the template  m The size of the image in the document    a The folder value    You can manually pick out the media to be used if either     m When the system does not find an appropriate media     You want to use another media than the one selected by the application  or   m When you have changed some print settings in the file  the  Scale factor     the  Orien   tation of the image on the media            Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 265    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Advanced       Media    settings       Illustration       Mederoe Cet Ret Late sj  msm Otte
204. oductivity 319    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the    Print Setting       Setting Description       Presentation      You can use the  Presentation  Print Setting    for excellent quality  printing of high coverage area prints  3D CAD  Posters  Photos    The print speed is around 3 minutes per Ao    Typical example of a file that can be printed with the  Presenta   tion  Print Setting              Before you begin    This setting is editable for the Key operator or Power user     How to set the  Print Setting       1  Click  Preferences    Print job defaults       2  Click  Edit  in the  Basic    bar or click the value of the  Print Setting    setting    3  Select  Oc   Print Assistant    for the best balance between print quality and print speed   Select    Economy    if the print productivity is the most important factor   Select  Presentation  if the print quality is the most important factor    4  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or    Cancel    to reject your entries     320 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Set the    Production Plus    setting       Set the    Production Plus    setting    Introduction    You can use the    Production Plus    setting in the Oc   Express WebTools to define how  the Oc   ColorWave 600 must interpret the    Production     Print Setting        Before you begin    This setting is editable for the Key operator or Power user     How to set the    Product
205. oll wheel    to select    Auto detect  IPv4  only   if the system must automatically detect your  network settings  Confirm your entry with the     Confirmation key  above the    Scroll wheel      Use the    Upper right softkey    to go to next step and  continue with step 9    Manual   Use the  Scroll wheel    to select  Manual  if you want  to configure the network settings manually  Con   firm your entry with the  Confirmation key  above  the    Scroll wheel      Use the  Upper right softkey    to go to the next step   You must now first follow the procedure to enter  the network settings manually   see    Configure the  network settings manually    on page 61     The following message is displayed      Auto network discovery in progress             58 Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Run the installation wizard from the printer operator panel       Illustration    The printer operator panel now displays the network  settings    Record the IP address  for example  134 188 26 173    You need this IP address to access the  Oc   Express  WebTools    later in order to complete the printer con           Se eet mew  figuration    Setevey   1   i     baag  Use the  Upper right softkey    to finish the network in      ses  stallation procedure and to continue with the printer    installation     The following message is displayed       Insert the toner cartridges      Follow the steps as indicated in t
206. olorWave 600 407    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Preferred Oc   media types and sizes       Preferred Oc   media types and sizes    Introduction    Oc   machines and media are matched for the best quality and performance  Oc   advises  only approved Oc   media  You can receive a full list of the Oc   media that you can use  in your printer  that includes plain paper  transparent paper  colored papers and different  polyester films  from your Oc   representative     Attention    A Do not store the paper in rooms where temperature and humidity are high  Avoid dust  and direct sunlight  Wrap unused paper in the plastic to prevent it from absorbing  moisture     Media types   Europe    The following preferred media types are available for the Oc   ColorWave 600 in Europe     Preferred media types   Europe   Papers    Description g m     Name on the Output delivery    mil Printer operator  or panel              mu   LFMo22   Oc   Black Label 75 LFMo22 Oc    Top delivery tray   Black Label   LFMo23   Oc   Black Label LFMo23 Oc    Top delivery tray     Black Label    LFMo54_   Oc   Red Label LFMo54 Oc   Red    Top delivery tray   Label    LFMo90   Oc   Top Color 90 LFMogo0 Top Col   or 90   LFMo91   Oc   Top Color 120   LFMog1 Top Col   or 120  back      LFMo92   Oc   Top Color LFMo92 Top Col     External output  or 140  back                  Top delivery tray                      External output          LFMo96   Oc   Top Color LFMo96 Top Col       External output 
207. om Manuals    Make a new media profile available on the printer operator panel       Make a new media profile available on the printer operator  panel    How to make a new media profile available on the printer operator panel    1  Download the correct media profile from the Oc   website   see    Download a media profile  from the Oc   web site    on page 286    2  Upload the correct media profile to the Oc   ColorWave 600 embedded controller   see  Upload a media profile    on page 287    3  Click the check box of a media profile and click the  Enable  button in the toolbar above  the media profiles list to make the media profile available on the printer operator panel      i  Note     You cannot restart the Oc   ColorWave 600 controller  You can only switch off and on  the Oc   ColorWave 600 printer  The media list on the printer operator panel will be  updated automatically     306 Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Define the correct media for your jobs       Define the correct media for your jobs    Definition  To achieve optimal output quality  make sure that you load and define the correct media  type on the printer     Make sure you define the correct media type for your job  Check if the media type  with  the correct media format  that you defined in your job is available on the printer     When productivity with different media sizes is the most important requirement     1 Load up to 6 
208. on   firm with the  Confirmation key     above the    Scroll    wheel               Use the    Scroll wheel    to select the Quality Reference    Chart and confirm with the  Confirmation key   above  the    Scroll wheel          Cercer tat Economy nese   Decrcor tr  Proget tion Mode     WDA Preperiation Mode  senshi anahyrts Tee          356 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Your Quality Reference Chart    Step   Action Remarks    5 Press  Finish  to print the Quality Reference Chart     Select  Back  and  Home  to revert to the  Home   screen        Result  The Quality Reference Chart is printed on an A1 format     Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 357    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    2D CAD monochrome       2D CAD monochrome    K L NL    N i    ENANAR    t l shited T                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      3N1017                                                 3N1053                                                                                                                                                                                               
209. on ssessrssrisiissssasssicaesiioirsessoritsaess 205  Oc   TonerPearls   Oc   TonerPearls    ccccccccccscesscesscesscesessssesseeees 64  Oc   Windows    Printer Driver   Oc   Windows    Printer Driver            000008 207  OMP file   OMP file sareni enkai 283  Omp file   Omp Menistre sesi inene 286  Open   Smart LAbOx  sisicesseisassesssssesscsddnsesscdssavsesseeseeve 200  Optimize   long  plot mode sissies  scsssssesscesisetescesesdeetevesess 326   PDE processing vsiassisisssvaiersestivecssesisossserscovers 324   printing of PDF documents        cece 325  Options   ASIDE RA RA ETEO 37  Orientation of image in the media   Orientation of image in the media           0004 268  Output delivery   Output delivery woe eeeeeeeeeeees    copy delivery tray       POMEL siisii irinin       receiving rack  basket       s ssssssssssssssesesseresseess 38   top delivery tray urian no 37  Output profile   Output profile ssecssssian ansia 343  Overview   color management settings   0 0    140  344       documentation   ssssssessessesresresersersresrerieresrerrese 14   hardware components  back       26   hardware components  front  wees 24   imaging SECUIOM penai nanes 30  432    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Keys socanana ipee a E S 31  licenses ski aai 105  394  Oc   Express WebTools      s sssssssessessesserseeeeee 88  print productivity settings           ccceeeeee 314  print quality settings 0 0 312       PRUNE SCLELO GS   sccssceesedeseesss leseseseseisstvenavesesensas 3
210. on the  media    is set to    Automatic       When folding is activated  the system aligns the image to  the corner of the media that will be on the top of the folded  packet    When folding is off  it centers the image on the media         Manual            Adjust alignment         It shifts the selected side or corner of the image to the edge  of the media        Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 269    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Advanced     Layout  settings       You can change the alignment of the image on the media   The reference is the image displayed in the    Print Preview     You can immediately check  the effect of the adjustment in the preview     Activate the option and type in a value     m In the    Horizontal    field  a positive value shifts the image to the right of media   A negative is a shift to the left  m In the  Vertical  field  a positive value shifts the image to the bottom of media   A negative value shifts it to the top   Check the result of the shift in the  Print Preview      You can set this value when you selected a  Sheet size    or a  Tray size     or  Manual feed   as the  Media size         Add margins around the image     Note   Li  This option is available on the Oc   ColorWave 600 and Oc   ColorWave 600 PP systems     Define whether the image to be printed needs additional margins  The additional margins  compensate for the non printable area on the media     If there are no margins  white space  arranged 
211. ons       Addresses of local Oc   organisations    Oc   Australia Ltd    P O  Box 363   Ferntree Gully MDC  Vic 3165   Australia  http   www oce com au     Oc   Belgium N V  S A   J  Bordetlaan 32   1140 Brussel   Belgium  http   www oce be     Oc   Osterreich GmbH  Postfach 95   1233 Vienna  Wienerbergstrasse 11  Vienna Twin Tower  1100 Vienna   Austria  http   www oce at     Oc   Brasil Com  rcio e Ind  stria Ltda   Av  das Na    es Unidas  11 857  Brooklin Novo   S  o Paulo SP 04578 000   Brazil   http   www oce brasil com br        Oc   Canada Inc    4711 Yonge Street  Suite 1100  Toronto  Ontario M2N 6K8  Canada    http   www oce ca     Oc   Office Equipment  Shanghai    First Shanghai Center  Phase I  Building  4    Lane 180  Zhangheng Road   Pudong District   Shanghai 201204  P R    China    http   www oce com cn        Oc   Czech Republic ltd   Babick   2329 2  149 00 Praha 4    Oc   Danmark a s  Vallensbekvej 45  2605 Brondby          http   www oce fi        Czech Republic Denmark  http   www oce cz  http   www oce dk    Oc   Finland OY Oc   France S A    Niittyrinne 7 32  Avenue du Pav   Neuf  02270 Espoo 93882 Noisy le grand  Cedex  Finland France    http   www oce  fr     422 Appendix C   Addresses of local Oc   organizations    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Addresses of local Oc   organisations       Oc   Deutschland GmbH  Solinger Strafe 5 7  45481 Miilheim Ruhr  Germany  http   www oce de     Oc   Hungaria Kft   H 1241 Budapest  Pf   237   H
212. ools       Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Description   Function    Creates the printed output     The  Oc   Express WebTools    provide multiple users a  remote view on the system and control on the system s  workflow  without any need to install software    The    System administrator    or the  Key operator    can   also use the  Oc   Express WebTools    to install the sys   tem and fine tune the system to optimally fit the cus   tomer s company workflow and processes    Any web browser can be used to browse to the IP ad     dress or hostname of the  Oc   ColorWave   600    Printer    to get immediate access to the  Oc   Express    WebTools           Chapter 2   Get to know the printing system 21    The Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system consumables       The Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system consumables       Consumable   Consumable part   Description            Roll that carries the media  A roll can  have a 2  core or a 3  core            Core    The core of the media roll is the card   board inner part of the roll         Toner cartridge    Toner cassette for cyan  yellow  black or  magenta toner          Oc   TonerPearls   Solid and clean spherical shaped toner  inside the cartridge           22 Chapter 2   Get to know the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Printer working area  Footprint   The Oc   ColorWave 600 printer  Printer working area  Footprint     The Oc   ColorWave 600 requires a floor space   working area of at
213. osscsnasoiens 218  Rendering  Color mode      ccccssessesseesceseeseesseseesecssesesenees 271  Ouai iener ee E 271  Rendering Options        cceceeeeeeeeeeeees 271  Rendering intent  absolute colorimetric       c cccccesscesscesseeseeseeees 342  perceptual  photo  wo    eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 339  relative colorimetric         csccsessessesseeseeseeeeesees 341  saturation  business graphics  occ 340  Rendering intents  Rendering intents russos 140  definition    ceeeccecccesscescsescesscessccssceseesseessseees 338  Replace  MAINTENANCE WAY  esson diseni eiei  media roll         ccceeeeee 74  146  150  291  295  POEL GAN   pE siisii isn orina    434    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals             Resolution   ResOlutiOn    wsssiessscercisssevescessavasternrestesaseescenies 403  Restart the system   Restart the system     cccecesseeseeeeseseeteesees 104  Restore   factory defaults sicssaisssevesescessessseunsestocisiestietens 101  Resume   ACEEVE JOD a  scssassdsdshadssiescoadeadeasesbatvesssasstenzsetens 216   PINTER preire kea na R 173  RGB color space   definition  25  acaceincieciecineasviversesesssewseverserie 333  RGB input data   RGB input Gata sissies seicassassiessssissscevereessaseiess 140  Roll   ROLL sscdsssscscossoscasnssosestusvosssetecssssansenecouaseserssesion       holder   loading station  Roll width detection   Roll width detection        ccccceceeeeeeees 125  281  Rotation   Rotation       Mode seisine oia iee iot E rE EES  Run the installation wizard  
214. ote   Perform the license activation job       for each license file               Chapter 9   License management 391    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The structure of license files and licenses       The structure of license files and licenses    Introduction    A license file contains a license per option of your Oc   system  You can view the current  y y  active licenses with Oc    Support     Licenses  tab in the Oc   Express WebTools  You can    preview the new active licenses during the license activation job     A license file contains licenses of the same license type    A license file you receive from Oc   contains only licenses of the same license type  The  following license types are possible       Demo  m Resale     If you order demo and resale licenses  you receive 2 license files     What you see per situation    What you see per situation depends on the license file you use     What you see depends on the situation    Situation    View the current active licenses     Oc   delivered one or more li   cense files     What do you see    You see the following    a All current active demo licenses     All current active resale licenses     All current other not active options     You see one of the following options    a A demo license file   m A resale license file   a A demo license file and a resale license file        Preview the demo licenses during  the license activation job if you  use the license file with demo li   censes        392 Chapter
215. ou can define the default values for     the specific settings of each  File format    the  Image  settings     Image orientation    and  Legend position      detailed in Set the  Image Properties    on page 259    the  Media  settings  see Set the default behaviour for the media selection    on page 239   the  Layout  settings     Orientation of the image on the media        Alignment    and   Margins    detailed in Layout settings on page 268    the  Rendering    settings     Color mode      Print mode    and the  Print optimization      detailed in Rendering settings on page 271    the  Finishing    settings     Additional strips      Finishing options    and  Delivery destination       detailed in Finishing settings on page 274    The    Stamping    settings  detailed in    By default  the system will apply these rules and values to all documents of every new job  for the printer in question   The availability and name of these settings depend on the printer     Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 237    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Print  copy  template definition    Illustration       238 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the default behaviour for the media selection       Set the default behaviour for the media selection    Definition  In the  Media  section of a template  you define the way the system will behave when se   lecting a media for a document     Media settings    Define t
216. ou to send print jobs to your  Oc   ColorWave 60o     Note   You need a license to be able to print PostScript   files on the Oc   ColorWave 600     Note   More information about how to install  configure and use the driver is available in the    documentation provided with the Oc   PostScript   3 Driver     the Oc   PostScript   3 Driver Online Help    the Oc   PostScript   3 Driver Installation manual    Illustration          JO cenGerng r  ra  Porceptual  photo   Oot ob Ticket  On  Accounting             How to use the Oc   PostScript   3 Driver to send a print job    Step   Action Remarks       1 Open the file that you want to  print in the source application     Chapter 5   Use the printing system 209    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Use Oc   PostScript   3 Driverto send a print job       Step   Action   Remarks    From the  File  menu of the ap   plication  click  Print    Select the Oc   ColorWave 600    in the    Printer    area of the    Print       dialog box        Click  Properties  and  Ad  You can define the default print job set   vanced     tings in the Oc   Express WebTools     Activate the Oc   Job Ticket to  overrule the default values for    the job settings    6 Check and change the Printer  Features settings if necessary    7 Click  OK  to send the print job  to the print queue        210 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Use FTP to send a print job       Use FTP to send a print job   
217. ower user     How to set the Spool threshold    1  Click  Preferences       System properties      2  Click  Edit  in the  Printer properties    bar or click the value of the  Spool threshold  setting   3  Select the correct value   Select  Low  if print productivity is an important factor   4  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or  Cancel  to reject your entries     328 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the    Print while RIP    setting       Set the    Print while RIP    setting    Introduction    This setting is a performance optimization setting  When  Print while RIP  is enabled   for Economy prints  the printer starts to print an image during the rasterization of the  image  Occasionally the rasterization of the image cannot keep up with the print speed   In that case the print process will be aborted  error code 22801  and the print will be re   covered afterwards  To prevent this you can disable this setting  Even when disabled  the  printer still starts to print rasterized pages before all pages of a job are rasterized     You can choose one of following values     m    Enabled     This is the default setting   m    Disabled       Select this value if you often encounter error code 22801     Before you begin    This setting is editable for the Key operator or Power user     How to set the    Print while RIP    setting    1  Click  Preferences       System properties      2  Click  Edit    in the  Pri
218. p Film   175 LFM342 Roll up      External output  Film  back      LFM360   Oc   Self adhesive   155 LFM36o0 S A Film    External output  PET Film 155um  back            Appendix A   Specifications of the Oc   ColorWave 600 409    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Preferred Oc   media types and sizes          Name on the Output delivery  Printer operator    panel       LFM450   Contrast Film i23 LFM450 Contrast    External output  4 mil  back         Preferred media types   Europe   Specialities    Media Description g m     Name on the Output delivery                   code mil Printer operator  or panel    mu  LFMo34_   Blue back paper 110   LFMo34 Blueback  110  LFMo35   Oc   Fine Linen Pa    119 LFMo35 Fine    External output  per Linen 120  back    LFMo36   Blue back paper 100   LFMo36 Blueback    Top delivery tray   100  LFMo38   Oc   Map paper 80 90   LFMo38 Map pa   FSC gogr per 98  LFM330   Tyvek 75 LFM330 Oc    Tyvek 75  LFM340   Oc   Lightblock 210 LFM34o0 Light   block 210gr  LFM344   Oc   Soft Banner 120 LFM344 Soft Ban   ner  LFM346   Oc   FR Banner 130 LFM346 FR Ban   ner 130  LFM410   Oc   Fluorescent 90 LFM410 Fluores   cent  LFM420   Oc   Colored Paper LFM420 Colored  80  LFM425   Oc   Colored Paper LFM425 Colored  FSC 80  Oc   Colored Paper LFM430 Colored  120                 Top delivery tray                Top delivery tray         Top delivery tray                External output     back         External output     back         External output 
219. ply    m Use the green main power switch to  switch off the printer    m Disconnect the mains supply cable        To connect the mains supply      Connect the mains supply cable    m Use the green main power switch to  switch on the printer           172 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Pause or resume the printer       Pause or resume the printer    Introduction    If you do not want the printer to start printing you can pause the printer  If the printer  can start printing again you can resume the printer     How to    Pause    or  Resume     the printer    Action Remarks    To pause the printer    In the  Queue  screen use the  Lower left softkey    key on the   printer operator panel to pause the printer    The following message is displayed    m    Printer pause requested      m    The printer stops after this page     if the printer was busy  printing     In the  Queue  screen use the  Lower right softkey  to  Re   sume    the printer           Chapter 5   Use the printing system 173    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Introduction       Solve problems with the printer  Introduction    Introduction    If there is a problem with the printer that the operator can solve  the printer operator  panel displays the following message        Please follow the instructions on the printer operator panel step by step  For additional  information about some instructions or the location of specific covers or doors  plea
220. print jobs open the event list in  the    Jobs    tab     Overview calibration error codes    Error code   Action Remarks    Calibration not accepted  Roll not loaded    Calibration not accepted  Roll too small       Calibration not accepted  Media type not suitable for instal   lation calibrations    22920 Calibration not accepted  Media type not suitable for Y   alignment    Calibration not accepted  Media type not suitable for pa   per step calibration       Calibration not accepted  External output not available for  delivery    22923 Calibration not accepted  Printer engine status is not  standby or the folder  if config   ured  is offline or turned off    Calibration failed  Out of toner during calibrations  Calibration failed  Out of media during calibrations          Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 385    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Calibration error codes       386 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Chapter 9  License management    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Introduction to managing licenses       Introduction to managing licenses    Introduction    The Oc   applications and options are protected against unauthorized use  You need to  activate the license to enable an application or option for use  The    Support       Licenses   tab in the Oc   Express WebTools enables you to manage the licenses very easily     This section describes the following   m
221. print the Customer  Acceptance Test    Check the colored bars of the test print     Note    Either check the test print on the second half of the print or reprint the Customer Accep   tance Test and check the second print  When the colored bars are OK  the system functions  correctly  However  it is always advised to switch to a higher print mode     Select a higher print mode  even when you use the  Oc   Print Assistant       Try to print on another media    If the colored bars of the Customer Acceptance Test demo print still show lines you must  contact the Oc   Helpdesk     380 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Calibrate the Oc   ColorWave 600 printer       Calibrate the Oc   ColorWave 600 printer    When to do     i  Note     Only roll position 1 can be used for calibrations      i Note   Use only Oc    Media  for reliable calibrations      il Note     The printer will do the calibration automatically  You do not need to keep this printed  calibration chart     Evaluate the Customer Acceptance Test print  If the print shows any output quality  problems  you can use this calibration wizard to check if the Oc   ColorWave 600 works    properly   The calibration will take a several minutes  The printed output is delivered at the rear  side of the printer and lead through the slot below the  Top back cover        Attention   A If a copy delivery tray is installed  remove the copy delivery tray from the engine and 
222. pter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Advanced     Layout  settings       m    Automatic     the orientation of the image is selected by the system in order to optimize  the position of the image  according to the settings defined   Folding        Legend posi     tion            m    Manual     to manually define the orientation of the image on the media  according to  the media previously set in the  Basic  or  Media  tab        When the  Media size       1S     A    Sheet size     a  Tray     size    or a sheet from the    You can decide to      Print image short edge first    The short edge of the image  is aligned to the leading edge of the media          Manual feed          Print image long edge first    The long edge of the image  is aligned to the leading edge of the media            Print image on a portrait sheet      The top of the image is  aligned to the short edge of the media        A  Roll size          Print image on a landscape sheet    The top of the image  is aligned to the long edge of the media           Print image short edge first                Print image long edge first          In all cases  you can select     m    Add a 180 degrees extra rotation    to rotate the output by 180 degrees    a    Mirror          Alignment       You can choose the way the image is aligned by selecting either        Automatic        Recommended for most users    It is the best option when    Orientation of the image 
223. r             Jobs in a Smart Inbox    You can use Smart Inboxes to manage your jobs  When you open the    Jobs    tab in the  Oc   Express WebTools the Smart Inbox section displays an overview of the Smart Inboxes   Define one or more Smart Inbox names that allow you to easily organize and access your  jobs     All print jobs sent via printer drivers  applications or one of the Oc   Publisher job sub   mitters are placed in a Smart Inbox    In the printer driver  application or job submitter you can select the Smart Inbox you  want tot print to  The    Preferences       System properties       Job management       Override  destination of print jobs  setting determines if a job can also be sent to the job queue    194 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The    Smart Inbox    and Jobs Queue concept       immediately  When a print job is kept in the Smart Inbox and you can start the print job  manually on the user panel or in the Oc   Express WebTools     Smart Inbox functionality     View job information     To view the job information click on the job name in the Smart Inbox      Delete   To delete a job from the Smart Inbox select the job and click  Delete       Edit   To edit the job settings of a job select the job and click  Edit   A window opens where  you can change a limited number of job settings      Print    To print a job select the job and click  Print   The job is copied into the Job Queue  The  job remains in the
224. r    1     Li   Li     After you click the value of the setting you want to edit  a log in window appears   You can select a user role from the drop down list     Note   The user role with the required authorization is already selected     Enter the password     Note   If the password is entered incorrectly  a message appears  You can enter the password  again     Click  Ok  to confirm your entry     Note   Once you have logged in  the log in lasts for the duration of the browser session  If you  have not been active for more than 30 minutes  the session expires and you need to login  again     Note   For security reasons it may be useful to periodically change the password for the 3 access  modes  Key operator  System administrator  Power user  to the Oc   Express WebTools     112 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Log out after your session       Log out after your session    Purpose    When you have finished the modification of a setting  it is advised to log out again     How to log out after you have finished your session    1  Click the log out hyperlink in the top right hand corner of the screen   or  2  Close the screen of your internet browser        mLog in as an authorized user  on page 112    Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 113    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Change the password for authorized users       Change the password for authorized users    When to do    For security reasons
225. r com Manuals    Business graphics       Business graphics         zo INS A    Y       The advised settings    You can also find an overview of the advised settings on the Quality Reference Chart  This chart gives an overview of the different types of print files and the print settings and  color management settings that give the best output result for these print files    The Quality Reference Chart is available as a demo print on the printer operator panel    see How to print the Quality Reference Chart    on page 355     Note   Li  For optimal print quality please verify that the name of the loaded media corresponds  with the media name on the printer operator panel     Setting Advised value Advised rendering intent  value     Print Setting     Oc   Print Assistant             Color feel       Oc   enhanced colors       Relative colorimetric       372 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    3D CAD       3D CAD          ree    The advised settings    You can also find an overview of the advised settings on the Quality Reference Chart  This chart gives an overview of the different types of print files and the print settings and  color management settings that give the best output result for these print files    The Quality Reference Chart is available as a demo print on the printer operator panel    see    How to print the Quality Reference Chart    on page 355      i  Note     For optimal print quality please verify 
226. r input as precisely  as possible on the printed output   With the color management settings you define how to convert the color information of  the file you want to print  input color space  RGB or CMYK color space  to the output  color space of the Oc   ColorWave 600  CMYK color space   This conversion can require  approximations in order to preserve the image s most important color qualities     To be able to reproduce colors it is important to define the following   m Input profile   Standardization   m Color feel   Rendering intents     Output profile    332 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    What is an input profile   standardization        What is an input profile   standardization     Definition    An input profile   standardisation defines what colour space you must use to interpret  the colour information of the file you want to print in a correct manner     The two main input profiles  colour spaces  are the following        RGB  The RGB colour space is based on the RGB colour model  RGB  Red  Green  Blue   is a suitable colour model for computer graphics because the human visual system  operates in a similar manner   The RGB colour space is an additive colour space  where you can mix colours based  on light  You can create white light if you add equal parts of each of the three primary  colours  Red  green and blue All three colours are required to produce white and the  absence of all three produces b
227. r media request time out       1  Click  Preferences       System properties       2  Click  Edit  in the  Printer properties    bar or click the value of the  Action after media  request time out    setting    Click  Put the job on attention state    or    Delete the job        we    4  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or  Cancel  to reject your entries     Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 121    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Configure the  Printer panel time out          Configure the    Printer panel time out     Introduction    The printer operator panel can automatically return to the Home screen  When this setting  is disabled  the panel never returns to the Home screen automatically     Note   Li  When enabled  the printer operator panel returns to the Home screen when the keys  and the scroll wheel are not activated during the specified time out period     When to do    Enable the setting and define a suitable time out period that does not interfere with the  print productivity     How to configure the  Printer panel time out     1  Click  Preferences     System properties       2  Click  Edit  in the  Printer properties  bar or click the value of the  Printer panel time   out  setting    3  When you enable the setting  you must enter a time period as well  If you choose to disable  the setting  the time out period will not be adjustable    4  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or    Cancel    to reject your entries     122 Chapter 4   Confi
228. re   move the copy delivery tray data cable from the controller before starting the calibration     Attention   A Ifa folder is installed  make sure that the folder is switched ON and lift the bridge before    starting the calibration     Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 381    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Calibrate the Oc   ColorWave 600 printer       How to calibrate the Oc   ColorWave 600 printer       Step   Action    1 From the  Home  screen on the printer operator panel  select the  System  tab     Select the  Maintenance     tab with the upper left softkey     Remarks       Use the    Scroll wheel    to select  Calibration  and con     firm with the  Confirmation key   above the    Scroll  wheel         The wizard assists you to do a calibration     Press    Next    to start the calibration     382 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals           R Clear syrien  EI Perera af hae Porh syi tere  is Dome pret   Print a gerne wage        lt n hege Counters    a  s Caner etme    Press hest t start       Calibrate the Oc   ColorWave 600 printer       Remarks    Now you can select   m paper transport  m full calibration    Press  Next  to start the calibration     Press  Finish  to continue     Note    If the calibration failed  you will be informed  immediately through an error code on the     Printer operator panel        Press Finish te cortas    Select  System      R Clear syrien  EI 
229. re version    4  When you click on the  Update  button a wizard starts to help you to install updates and  patches    5  When you click  OK     a dialog window appears    Use the upper  Browse     button to browse to the directory where the operating system  software upgrade file is located  Select the correct file and click  Open     Use the lower  Browse     button to browse to the directory where the software upgrade  file is located  Select the correct file and click    Open        Note   Li  Distribution of the files via http   global oce com support is not possible yet     102 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Update the Oc   ColorWave 600 software       Note   Li  You must select both packages of the same version  It is not possible to update only one  package   6  Click  OK     i  Note   The system checks the current software version and displays a warning message if appli     cable  A software upgrade or downgrade is not possible in all situations     You must wait approximately 15 minutes while the software update files are transferred  to the printer  The progress bar  at the bottom of the page  indicates the progress  The  printer checks if the files are received correctly and if the update packages are valid  When  all files are transferred  a dialogue window appears    7  Click  OK   A dialog window appears    8  When you click  OK  a confirmation window with some warnings appears   Then a warning message 
230. red Gin Gicsiesevievicectechite atedeieiesesiereodivese sienna ana a aaae easain 115  Enable or disable the e shredding function                   eeeeeee 115  Select the e shredding algorithm                ccecessseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 116  Specify the number of overwrite PaSSES         ccccccessssssseeeeeeeeees 117  Configure the Printer             cccccecessssecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeesenaeeees 118  The  System properties    tab in the Oc   Express WebTools           118  What you need to know about default settingS                   118  Configure the regional settings of the Oc   ColorWave 600    119  Define the display languages of the printer            ccsccccceeeeees 120  Configure the  Media request time out              ccceeceeeeeeeessenenees 121  Configure the    Printer panel time out                cceeeeeeeeseeeeee teeta 122  Configure the energy save modes of the Oc   ColorWave 600 123  Configure the media SIZ S               ccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 125  The    Configuration    tab in the Oc   Express WebToolg              0 127  Configure the network settings in the Oc   Express WebTools  sic tia Veiieis E EE A A EEA e A tee den 127  Set the  Network duplex mode            cccscessscecceeeeeeeeeeeseeesseesseees 128       Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Contents       Set the  Network Speed                  csssesssssssesnseeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeesseeeeees 129   Relevant settings on the printer operator panel
231. rinter can be reached in the net   work           Job aborted due to reception  problem  protocol error  connec   tion failure  spool full   nothing  was printed     m Check the structure and keywords of the Oc    Job Ticket    m When the user panel displays the message    Job  memory full     delete some jobs from the system    m Check if the printer can be reached in the net   work           Document could not be printed   specific TIFF CALS mode is not  supported       The document type is not supported by the printer   for instance  CALS file of type 2    m Check the list of supported document types           Document could not be pro   cessed  processing was aborted       The file is complex and the printer does not have   enough memory to process it    m Try to print it from an application using the  Oc   Windows   Printer Driver    m Ifthe error persists  contact Oc   Service         PS PDF missing or invalid data  in the document  one or more  pages not correctly printed          224 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       The Postscript or PDF file is corrupt    m Try to print it from an application using the  Oc   Windows   Printer Driver    m If the error persists  contact Oc   Service        Event messages       Event message     PS PDF limitation  one or more  pages not correctly printed        PS PDF resource issue  memo   ry  disk   one or more pages not  correctly printed       Troubleshoot    The Postscript or P
232. roduction    The Oc   applications and optional functions are protected against unauthorized use  You  need to activate the license to enable an application or optional function for use  The     Licenses    tab enables you to upload new license files to activate a license     Purpose    m Upload a new license file   m Extend the existing license on your Oc   ColorWave 600     Note   Li  After the license is uploaded you must restart your system to activate the license file     How to get a new license file    1  Click    Support       Licenses  to display the license information page    2  The login window appears  Log on as System administrator or Power user    3  Click the host id hyperlink to display the host id information    4  Copy the id and send the host id information to your Oc   representative together with  a list of options that you require    5  After receiving the license file s   store the file s  on the network     Attention    A It is advised to store the license information of the currently active license files in a back   up file before you activate a new license file  Use the  Save  button to store the current  license files information     Upload a new license    1  Click    Activate    to open a browser window to search for the license file on the network    2  Log on as System administrator or Power user    3  Browse the network and select the license file    4  Click  Ok  to start the activation of the license file  A message is displayed when the pro
233. rom ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Basic copy job       Result    The scanner scans the original and sends the copy job directly to the Oc   ColorWave  600 printer  The printer uses the print settings defined in the default copy template  See     Change the default Publisher Copy print  copy  template    on page 236      254 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Extended copy job       Do an extended copy job     Direct copy  mode    disabled     Extended copy job    Before you begin    Make sure    Direct copy mode  is disabled  See    Enable or disable  Direct copy mode    on  page 242   Your copy job is not automatically sent to the printer  You can edit the print  settings before you send the copy job to the printer     How to do an extended copy job    1  Place the original face down and right aligned   The scanner takes the original         270  Place the original face down and right aligned     2  Select a Publisher Copy template or change the  Destination    of an existing template to  Publisher Copy    3  Change the scan settings if necessary and press the green start key    4  When the document is scanned a  New Job    window opens  In the  Job Composition     section you can select your copy job and edit the print settings  See The    Edit Document  Print Settings  window    on page 257      Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 255    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Extended copy job     i  No
234. rom ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Close the  Top cover    and flap back the  Top delivery tray     Close the  Top cover  and flap back the  Top delivery tray       If you are ready    Illustration    Close the  Top cover        Unlock the metal locking mech   anisms of the left and the right  part of the top delivery tray     Flap back the left part and the  right part of the top delivery     Note    If the left part and the  right part of the top de   livery tray are not in the  same position  you can  adjust the top delivery  tray   see Adjust the  Top  delivery tray    on page  187           180 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Check and clean the print surface       Check and clean the print surface    Introduction    This document describes how to check and clean the print surface     When to do    When a media jam occurs or when there is pollution on your printed output  one of the  steps to solve the problem is to clean the print surface     Required tool    m Clean card    Illustration        207  Clean card    Chapter 5   Use the printing system 181    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Check and clean the print surface    How to check and clean the print surface    Action Illustration    Remove the top delivery tray and  open the  Top cover      see    Pull up the  Top delivery  tray    and open the  Top cover    on    page 178     Check if toner drops are on the  print surface     Remove the toner wi
235. s 388  Map   advised setin gsissrie naaa 362  Margins   Margins  asssseissssdscesacsdiescoedeicessesdszseassassteacseiens 270  Measurement unit   Measurement unit      cccceeeeeseeeeees 83  119  234  Media    drawer REP PEISTE  drawer numbers    roll numbers        c  cccccesseescesscesscessceeesseeeseeees  media  Media configuration   Media configuration oo    cece 125  281  Media Information   Media Information         ccccccscescesscesseeseeeseeees 267          Media jam    Media Ja See raO    Media profile    Media protilessoescsssiites sesenssbsesedeakieseceteveneas  AowiilOad surini  stall sszesecsceecatesssdsssvaicscaviavdeadestasecsssoicsvase    make available      Manage oo        Update ssecsccescsnsiccneoassorscassssroverdescssdbeidereoeses 287  Media request   problems with print jobs    221  Media request time out   Media request time out       eee 121  Media roll   Wad ge E EE EE 74  150  295   TEMOVE nsssssssssssessressesseseeessreseressreseresse 146  291   replace         74  146  150  291  295       Upa E vicessisdessssensesdsedeandtsessscerdsnser 72  148  293  Media selection policy  Media selection policy woes 137    Media series    Media series         cccccssccsscsssesssessessesssees 125  281    Media sizes    Media sizes      ccccccecessssseesseesseessesseeeseees 125  281    Media source    Media SOUrCE        ccscsssssssssssteseesscsecsscsseees    Media type    COPE  SIZE ies ind ceecyiceysiecnauegs scsecustescneses A  delne sanen a aera ae    SEL ECE a
236. s passed the metal pa   per guide  1               Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started 77    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load a media roll    Illustration    Use both hands to slide the me   dia under the metal paper guide     A  beep  confirms the correct  paper transport  2               Close the media drawer     Note   Do not open the  Media  drawer    during loading              78 Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load a media roll         Action Illustration    11    The following screen appears on  B the printer operator panel     Now meca Ge tected on rem 1    Preti Rent if the dtiplayet mete    Note  hase is correct H not  press Diner  When you load a media     roll the printer automat  A   ically detects the roll  un cont    width  If the detected  roll width is not a stan  ao  dard width  the printer   selects the next smaller   roll width that is sup    ported by the printer        Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started 79    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Complete the printer configuration in the Oc   Express WebTools       Complete the printer configuration in the Oc   Express  WebTools    1  Open a web browser on a customer workstation connected to the network     hw    Li       Enter the following address   http    lt Oc   ColorWave 600 IP address gt    for example    http   134 188 26 173  to acc
237. sPrinter com Manuals       Configure the network settings manually       Configure the network settings manually    Introduction    If you want configure the network settings manually  please contact your network admin   istrator to get information about the network infrastructure and parameters     How to configure the network settings manually      Action    Illustration    If you want to enter the network settings manually   use the    Scroll wheel    to select  Manual   Confirm  your entry with the  Confirmation key    above the     Scroll wheel       Use the    Upper right softkey    to go to the next  step     The printer operator panel displays the following  message     You can now change network settings for     Hostname       Suffix      Press the  Lower right softkey    to select the  Ad   vanced  tab        Use the    Scroll wheel    to select your network speed              Auto negotiation        10 MBit FD      10 MBit HD       100 MBit FD      100 MBit HD        Confirm your entry with the    Confirmation key    above the    Scroll wheel    SS Es  Use the    Upper right softkey    to go to the next   step        Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started 61    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Configure the network settings manually       Illustration         Enter your IP address   Use the    Scroll wheel    to select the first numeric       field  Confirm your selection with the  Confirma   tion key  above the  Scroll wheel  
238. sPrinter com Manuals    Define the media type and the core size       Define the media type and the core size    How to define the media type and the core size    Action Illustration    If the displayed media type and core size is correct you    can press  Next  and go to step 4   Otherwise  press  Other media    and continue with step  on    Now mema detected on ren t       Preti Next if the ctiplayed mete  ape ts Correct If ret  press Omer  mega       Use the  Scroll wheel  to select the correct media type  from the list and confirm your entry with the  Confir   mation key      Note    If the correct media type is not available on  your printer operator panel  you must first  make a new media profile available on the    printer operator panel   see Make a new media  profile available on the printer operator panel     on page 161     Use the    Scroll wheel    to select the correct core size for  your new media roll and confirm your entry with the     Confirmation key        Note   The standard roll core size for the  Oc   Color     Wave   600 Printer  is 3         156 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Define the media type and the core size          Illustration    Use the    Scroll wheel  to select the clean cut length for  your new media roll and confirm your entry with the     Confirmation key     Note   Select  Long strip  for new media     Press  Finish  and return to the  Home  screen     Note   When the strip is cut 
239. sarioi faissa ieivea neissa iie 20  Problem   color banding i ssssecsesessedsisesesscsvsisosonsusbessasbess 375   loss banding  srera aE 375   horizontal wavy lines across your print           S27   light or dark lines across your print   0    377   MOZZLSATOPOUE rosaa nan e 379   thin colored lines across your print             0   379   thin white lines across your print             379  Problems with print jobs   media YEGUE aiustansa pisii iiris 221  Production Plus   SCEEUAUG  inining uieii 321   433    Index       Production plus    Prod  ction plus s ssssscererecavsesieatreconecasseoreisaeeets 136  Production setting   Production setting       ccccsessesesesesseeeeseeees 317  Publisher Copy   Change DEITET sssaaa e REIA 235   introduction   OVEIVIEW oicchsescsssievassscssesveanictentacctnate cisnaxtes  s   Print  copy  template          c cssseeesseseeseeees 236   Print  copy  templates        eee 237    Scan destination  Scan template              User Preferences         Q  Quality  Oc   Print Assistant      cccccseccssesesetseeeteeeeees 272  Quality Reference Chart  Quality Reference Chart s s s 354  R  Receiving rack  basket   Receiving rack  basket      ccceeseseseseeeeeeees 38  Regional settings  Regional settings        cece 83  119  Relative colorimetric  Relative Colorimetric        ccccccssessessesseseeeeeesees 341  Remove  media toll scessisdecsdetsidvesss csetes eas sass eel ves  toner cartridge  Remove all jobs  Remove all jobsiecsisesssssrersisiecstssssis
240. sdeivissdsaes sdescsadedenassscavsiisnisess ete    428    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals                CEES sts ssscscasscscstacsdiesessdeadesvesdazveas sassieaesstess 120   PITEN  esissssivtasGeisi vache couctishesrianeveavstreee Bevadeaxs 130  Download   iMedia profile sscy hscicsovessdeseassavessveasveusseneasayec 286   media profile from the Oc   web site   0 0    286  Download media profiles   Download media profiles 1    ccc 283  Drivers   DENES exes E O E a R 415  E  E shredding   algorithm essien 116   Disable   Enable   Number of overwrite passes      cceeeeeeeeeees Tiz  Economy monochrome enhanced   Economy monochrome enhanced             4  136  Economy setting   Economy SCtunigs cscsissccercsessiiseseasssrsevserenetise 317  Edit a setting   Edita setting nreo 96    Edit Document Print Settings  BaslGssscstsstasesteveusbe lass ina a R E    Presentation        Rendering sorrietenai sisinio  Enable Direct copy mode   Enable Direct copy mode oo    242  Energy save modes       COMMPUTAONY siasii akaipa 123  Error code 22801   Error code 22801  esssssssssssessssosssrssesossesiseseese 329  Error codes   calibra ON  r E 385  Errors   Cover or door opened    s sssssssssssssireisereseseese 175   event listo  c cissccassisccsccsscecesscecesesssseesosse 214  223  Event   troubleshoot        ccccecccessesscesscesscsssceeesseeeseeees 224  Event list   Event listeners 214  223  Event messages   OVERVIEW  sassertasdiisiibvadsec dicts ETE eee 224    Index       F  Fac
241. se  refer to the following modules    m    Cover or door opened    on page 175    Pull up the  Top delivery tray  and open the  Top cover    on page 178       Close the  Top cover  and flap back the  Top delivery tray    on page 180       Cut the media    on page 190    174 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Cover or door opened       Cover or door opened    Introduction    The media drawers and certain covers must only be opened if you are asked to do so in  a wizard on the printer operator panel     Attention   A When you open one of the indicated covers or drawers while you are not in a wizard  the  system produces a warning signal  The red LED on the printer operator panel illuminates     Attention    A When you open one of these covers or drawers during printing  the printer stops and the  printer operator panel shows one of the warnings that are listed in the table below  When  you have closed the indicated cover or drawer  the print is cut and the print job is sent  to printer again     Displayed warning Position of the component     Media drawer   2  3  4     Cite netis   ewer    Note   Normally you open a media drawer to    load or replace a media roll or in case of a    media jam        Chapter 5   Use the printing system 175    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Cover or door opened    Displayed warning Position of the component       Front cover     6     Cose frost cower       Note   Normally you open t
242. se software problems    m Reprint the job from the submission applica   tion or from the Smart Inbox        Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Chapter 5   Use the printing system 225    Event messages       Event message       Job was deleted from the queue  after a media request timeout          Job cannot be printed because  the required PS PDF license is  not available       Troubleshoot    The job has been deleted from the print queue   because the time out of the media request expired   and the    Action after media request time out    is set   to    Delete the job      m Reprint the job from the submission applica   tion or from the Smart Inbox     m For Postscript and PDF files  check if the  Adobe   PostScript   3   PDF option is autho     rized           Job cannot be printed because  the required PDL is disabled        Folding disabled because legend  not detected or rotated docu   ment doesn   t fit on available  media          226 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       m Click    Configuration       Printer setup    and  check if printing of this printer description  language is    Enabled        The  Oc   Finishing Assistant    disabled folding   This can happen if the image cannot be rotated so  that the legend is visible after folding and fit on  the available media  This may also happen if the     Oc   Finishing Assistant    cannot detect the location  of the legend    m Disable  Oc   Finishing Assist
243. seceesees 34  90    Track a job    Tracka JOD i arsssssasicaeesuvcusitsaseseses seansiesi saaees 248    Trailing strip    Trailing Strip  ssciesivassaaesscsdensvesssidedevscecesesssnae  s 274    U  Unpack    media roll enamora  Update   media  profile sssini   printer software        System SOFCWALE      eseeeeeecseesectseseeeeeeseetecteesees  Upload   lice SES rasare RSR  User Preferences    Localization  eere ARE NAE 234    User roles  key Operator erir E R  Oc   Express WebTools       pOWEr USEF oo  eeeeeeeeeeeees  system administrator        cseseeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeees    V  Vertical shift    Vertical shift sccsccssssecsesasesssesscsvasacasssnnsvncssseers 138    View    EVENS rO E ENR 214  223  SVSUEMSLALES  cavessecosisiessctsnsscosessdescoicssnsteaseeess 169    View the settings  Oc   Express WebTools       ccc    Ww  Width detection    Width detection voccecccccccccsccessceseeees 125  281    Working area  Working atea cai ssisstescSedbeteibaatsedestsdssesacaresscatdee    436    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals                      Beyond the Ordinary   P      20110c    Illustrations and specifications do not necessarily apply to    products and services offered in each local market  Technical    specifications are subject to change without prior notice  Trademarks    mentioned in this document are the property of their respective owners     Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Maus          Printing for  Professionals    Creating global leadership in printing  Ca
244. sections are displayed     Section Description    1 The default settings section   In this section you can configure the default Oc   Publisher Copy settings   m Set the User preferences     see    User Preferences       on page 234   m Change the printer     see    Change printer    on page 235   m Change the default copy template     see Print  copy  template definition    on page 237     see Set the default behaviour for the media selection    on page 239   m Enable or disable  Direct copy mode        see    Enable or disable  Direct copy mode    on page 242           232 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The Oc   Publisher Copy sections       Section   Description    The  Copy job progress  section    This section displays information about the progress of the copy jobs   Overview of active jobs and job history    see    The    Active jobs  section and the  History  section    on page 244     Overview of the job status     see Job Status    on page 246    Track and manage submitted jobs     see    Track and manage a submitted job    on page 2 48        3 The Oc   ColorWave 600 printer information section   This section displays information about the Oc   ColorWave 600 printer  that is used for your copy jobs   m the list of jobs in the print queue  with the job name and the job  owner   the list of loaded media  the level of toner in the cartridges        Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 233    Downloaded
245. seesssesnteeeeees 216   Clear the SYStOM        ccccccccccccecceeeeceeeeeseesseesssseecssseeanseeeseeeeeeeeeeees 218   Solve problems with Print jODS            cccccceecessesesssseesssseanseeeseeeeeeees 221   How to solve problems with print jODS                  ccsssssssseeeseeees 221   VIEW CVENMS      cccccceeccessessssesescseeeanseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseessseesseseeesseneeen 223   Event MOSSQGES       ceceeeeeeecee ee eeeeee aces ee eeeeaeeaeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeees 224  Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy Option    ccecccccscceccceeeeeeeseeeeeessesssssssseeaaeeseeeaeees 229   HELO CU CEO each ectocscentenetesteaccreiats resins ceecance A A a E EERE 230   Overview of Oc   Publisher CoOpy         ccsscccssccccccccccceeeesecesesseesssssesseeeees 232   The Oc   Publisher Copy S   CtiONS             c ccceeesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeees 232   The default settings SCCtION             cceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeetenneaaees 234    User PreterenG s   vciisssssscevsseeisdedtecstcunitsstteseeelindedasassheavistdlarieees 234      Change Printer    seserinis anana rana aeara aa 235   Change the default Publisher Copy print  copy  template      236   Print  copy  template definition       ssseessessssesesssrrnrrseserrnnnnssrnnns 237   Set the default behaviour for the media selection                   239   Enable or disable  Direct copy mode             ccccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeees 242   The  Copy job progress    SCCtION       ccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeseessssesssssn
246. selected period    For example  if you sort your counter history list on the column  Job   owner  and you click on  Group view   the counter history list displays   a list with all Job owners that have sent print jobs to the printer in the   selected period  When you expand the  Job owner  group  the list dis     plays all jobs that were sent by the  Job owner  in the selected period              214 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Counter history          Functionali     ty    View totals     Save the  counter his   tory list     Print the  counter his   tory list     Description    When you click  View total info  in the upper right corner of the  counter history list  the total detailed counter information for all jobs  in the list is displayed     When you click on a group name in the counter history list  the total  detailed counter information for all jobs in the group is displayed     When you click on a job name in the counter history list  the total  detailed counter information for the selected job is displayed     When you click  Save all    in the upper right corner of the counter his   tory list  you can save the counter history for all jobs in the list   You can save the counter data as an  XML file  or as a  CSV file        When you click  Print all    in the upper right corner of the counter  history list  you can print the counter history for all jobs in the list        Chapter 5   Use the printing syste
247. send a print job                      Step     Action Remarks  5 In the    Smart Inbox    section en    Click the  Smart Inbox  hyperlink   Open  ter the name of an existing the Smart Inbox     to access the  Smart   Smart Inbox    or enter a new Inbox    in use   name  The hyperlink opens  in a new window   your web browser and the    Smart Inbox   section from the printer controller   Note   The  Smart Inbox    section of the  printer controller lists all the  Smart Inboxes created for the  printer   6 In the  Image  tab click  the More    button and activate     Oc   Ticket enabled    to overrule  the default values for the job  settings   F Check all tabs in the driver and  change the default settings if  necessary   8 Click  OK  to send the print job  to the print queue    i  Note   More information about how to install  configure and use the driver is available in the    documentation provided with the Oc   Windows   Printer Driver     the Oc   Windows   Printer Driver Online Help  m the Oc   Windows   Printer Driver User manual    Note   Li  The Oc   ColorWave 600 is delivered with a driver pack CD ROM  You can also  download the latest Oc   drivers  free of charge  from our Web site www oce com     208 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Use Oc   PostScript   3 Driverto send a print job       Use Oc   PostScript  3 Driverto send a print job    Introduction    Oc   provides the Oc   PostScript   3 Driver that allows y
248. senes 97  Settings file   Vaid  E PE E E E E TE 99   AR E E AE 98  Shut down the system   Shut down the system nsss 104  Sleep mode   Sleep ode ssiri isare orai aiias 123    Smart Inbox          concept   create           Glee isian a   multiple user and repro environment             199   multiple user environment           ccceeeeeees 197   OPS EN REA EK E EE 200   repro ENVIFONMEN  ssssssssssssssssiesesriertsrertesee 198  Solve output quality problems   Solve output quality problems      375  377  379  Specifications   controller  hardware        cssesscssesseeeeeseteeeeeees 400   controller  software    c cccecesesesessseteseeeeeees 401   dimensions se   GEIVELS E EE a csstvees ieee 415   TLE QUCLICY iniisip ean sinisi 403   media SIZES    sssssssessssrssesrersersrssesresresre 412  414   optional application software         ceeeeee 415   power consumption wee     403       printer           403   voltage           403   WERE sccsisscescsecsustavotonss ctgsesseoascconsanesvsasiotoes   403  Speed   Speed pnis isinisisi iiaia 403  Spool threshold   Spool threshold sissisiisssssesissasseiraisisisss 328  Stop    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    ACEIVE JOD visses cxssassessccsteedessosdesdeadsessessapeasssesces 216  Suffix   Seii nE EE cdeces icatens seustnstest E  61  Support tab   Oc   Express WebTools    s sssssssssssissssssessesresees 90  Supported   non Oc   media types     cseceseeseeseeseseeseseeeees 413  Switch off the printer   Switch off the printer  ss 
249. ssesesssseesceees 61  80  HP GL  HP GL 2  HP RTL   HP GL  HP GL 2  HP RTL oossoo 141  l  Icons   SYVSCEH SCALES E E euedsscatcasesstceces 170   TONER States aeran rA aen ARN ENEN E 171  Image Orientation   Legend position sssini iea 260   Reading orientation   s  ss ssssssessessssierisresreseee 259  Image Properties   File Format eein RTT 259   Image OrientatioDissssssisisiriiinis irisse 259  Imaging   etan lea EEEE 30   A E E 30   SECUON seen AE OEN 30  Input profile   standardization   definiti  n  eeir e nR Raa 333  Install   licenses mesoi anei n 108   media profile sannanir 287  Installation wizard   Installation wizard   s sssssssssssssssesesnsresersrsesreee 55  Internet Explorer 6   minimum browser security settings    s s    92  Internet Explorer 7   8   minimum browser security settings    s s    93  J  Job status   Job stasen RKA 244  Job submission   Job  s  bMisSiOf  sssdcesdscssvess c  vsiscsstecs sczecssessseeses   color management   TEP  aessdssoeecenssbsoeieouosos   IPE erea a RN E   Oc   Publisher Express   0     ccccesseseseseeeeee 202   Oc   Publisher Select 0    cseeesesseeeeeeteeeeeees 205   Oc   Windows    Printer Driver            00 207    Index       Jobs    ACUVE JODS arere nT EE 244       CLEATS     cccceeees    Jobs Queue    COMCEPE nE a acetate 194    K    Key operator    GOSCHPULOR ies csiscissas  sd sdseasseseteadssiescieteidsesesssess 110    Keys    COMMCMALON  35025  cssessessesdeeseessaseasesesssossestaaesisae       L  Language  Language se s
250. sssesdsessssscsetescsevescsaietens   photo realistic impression   point of sales graphics wc  ecceeeeeseeeeeeeeeees  Alignment   AEAEE  sssssissssssiversesesssisesesnoesionsoeses 138  269   Adjust alignment sissies  269   Mode sacerake Ea 331  Analyze print quality   Analyze print quality 0    375  377  379  Authorizations   Oc   Express WebTools       ccsseeseeeeeee 110  Automatic legend detection   Oc   Publisher Select wo  205  Automatic roll switch   Automatic roll switch woes 327  Available documentation   Oc   Express WebTools       c cect   Oc   PostScript   3 Driver   Oc   Windows   Printer Driver seses 15       Basic    Copy Count       Finishing sisevessstvesiscsessveaesevcaesinssavedsstusveceatsvec       Binding strip   Binding Stilesin 274  Browser security settings   Browser security settings    s   sessessersereerreseesee  92  Business graphics   advised  settings sis csissscaisesstesnnserteanevsveretaene 372    c  Calibrate  Maintenance  o  cseesseseessessessessesseseesesscsseeesesees 381  the pinter erare ae ERAR 382  Calibration  CETOP COMES uraisi srai esei a 385  Cartridge  Cartridge  a  ciedsiieis dak cossedsasscstcendossastseveateaussissseas 64       load a toner cartridge weet    remove a toner cartridge  replace a toner cartridge    CAT    Change    passwords in the Oc   Express WebTools    SSUES  A E    Change printer    Change printer resrusceyciekaii icen    Change the default copy template    Change the default copy template   0       Check    Nt CE
251. ssssssssssssssssssiessesssesse 172  Switch on the printer   Switch on the printer    53 172  System   POSTAL    ssonscoeicodsisveiceoeshovscsscnsersssvasensessesbesssibess 104   shut down  remotely  neseser 104  System administrator   descrip ELON  derer ens RERE R E 110  System monitor   ACTIVATE arara EREATARA 168  System requirements   System requirements oc eeeeeeeeeeeeseee 92  System software   update siisciscsccesessouscossesesssseesessdtass sduseses siesces 102  System states   OVELVICW  seecsdih R E A 170   E E TEE FAE RA 169  System tab   Oc   Express WebTools wees 91  T  TAC   TAG Ona REAKIROS 34  90  Templates   For the printer s cssssscossescsssseeiesetsesssssiesss ssseaees 237   Media  size jitacaiacicitisiece gemaaunaie 240   Media  SOUrGe sssini rescissione 240   Media type sisri iin ia 239  TIFF and JPEG   TIFF and JPEG oogenesis sessassessseases 141  Time format   Time format     ccccccccesscesssccessesessecesseeee 83  119  Time zone   Timezone cniri ara EESE 83  119  Toner cartridge   Toner   artidge seprei RRE 64  Toner states   OWGRVICW  sisiiesivssessesvtsscacseieatcscssduscsstesteseenascoe 171  TonerPearls   TonerPearls        cssseccssssssssessececsessesecsessesecseees 64  Top cover   435    Index       OPEN    sis E P E Hass Guissctvcriseaseys 178    Top delivery tray  Top delivery tray iscdiccscscscssstssssstansivsdsccsscveconsts    ETa M E A A AEE ET 187    pull   p eeaeee ar AELE 178    Total Area Click    Total Area Click woeciieccceseccsssecsssecs
252. stomize the  Job name       m Every job submitted by Oc   Color   Wave 600 is automatically sent to a     Smart Inbox  on the printer con   troller  The  Direct print    option sends  it to the printer queue  For each job   you must specify a name for the   Smart Inbox  to be used or created on  the controller  By default  the  Smart  Inbox  is the user login  You can cus   tomize the  Smart Inbox           From the  Job Composition     section  click  Add  and browse  to the document you want to  print    You can load one file  several  files or a complete folder at once           Click  Add Documents    to add  the document to the Job     If you added all documents that you want  to print to the Queue  click    OK           If you want to change the job  settings of documents in the Job   select the documents and click  Edit        A separate window opens where you can  adjust the job settings of the selected  documents  You can change the settings  per document and click  Apply  to assign  the settings to the selected document        Click  OK  to revert to the Oc    Publisher Select window              Click  Print        Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Once the job is submitted to the printer   you can follow its status in the    Submitted  Jobs  section  and then in the  History   window        Use Oc   Windows  Printer Driverto send a print job       Use Oc   Windows    Printer Driverto send a print job    Introdu
253. submission tools  The settings defined in the printer drivers or the job submission  tools always overrule the settings defined in the Oc   Express WebTools     118 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Configure the regional settings of the Oc   ColorWave 600       Configure the regional settings of the Oc   ColorWave 600    Purpose    The regional settings are configured during the installation of your Oc   ColorWave 600   If you want to change the initial configuration  you can do so in the    Regional settings        Define the regional settings for the printer in the following order    m    First language    and    Second language    of the printer operator panel   m    Measurement unit      m    Time zone     If you change the  Time zone  you must first reboot the system  before you set the     Current date and time            Current date and time      m    Time format        i  Note     Every time you change the  Measurement unit     the controller recalculates the values  from millimeter to inches and vice versa  If you reverse to the original value of this setting  a slight calculation difference can occur due to rounding differences     How to define the regional settings    1  Select  Preferences     System properties       2  Click  Edit  in the  Regional settings    bar or click the value of the setting you want to  edit  for example  First language       3  Modify the settings  You can choose between   m sett
254. t  a warning message is displayed   The legend  will not be on top of the folded packet        Depending on your printer and folder capabilities  set the fold options     Fold type      Fold  method      Folded delivery      Change folded packet size        Binding strip           When a combination of the settings generates conflicts  a message is displayed or the  combination is not available     m    The values of Fold type and Folded delivery are not compatible       m    Reinforcement and Binding strip are not compatible       Binding strip    is available  only when  Fold and reinforce    is not set   m    Reinforcement can be performed only with the DIN Fold method     Fold and rein   force    is available only when the  Fold method  is DIN and the  Fold type    is  Full  fold      m The length of the folded packet can be changed only when the  Fold type    is  Full fold       See Fold a job    on page 276 to get more details on how to adjust the folding settings     For more information on the folding capabilities of your printer  refer to your printer  and folder documentation     Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 275    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Fold a job       Fold a job    Introduction    When folding is enabled  Oc   ColorWave 600 analyses the values set in the selected  template  the  Image Properties     the size and the  Layout  information of each image to  define the orientation of the image on the media     It displays a previe
255. t Pe daa of Pe    roe    Deta Tap Detewry Pay CDT   Dedvery destination       Top Detvery Teny  TOT     Dorma tpat  heck     Merg a Ont end Ne Pe eter of Comet tint I cane a Senter a TRIO We he orn             ims  on    1hen_US_ pretjat rotete seha auto medr seng                                The output delivery    A    Attention     The following table gives an overview of the common output delivery destination  If the    media profile of the media you use requires a specific output delivery  the common delivery    destination will be overruled     Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Chapter 5   Use the printing system 159    The output delivery                 When the   and the default  media roll      Delivery destina   you use tion    is   has a    Then the printed output         3  roll  Top Delivery Tray   is delivered at the  Top Delivery Tray  TDT    core  TDT           External output     back    Ignored    is lead through the slot below the  Top back cover   at the back of the printer              N          160 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Make a new media profile available on the printer operator panel       Make a new media profile available on the printer operator  panel    How to make a new media profile available on the printer operator panel    1  Download the correct media profile from the Oc   website   see    Download a media profile  from the Oc   web site    on page 286   2  Upload the 
256. t gives an overview of the different types of print files and the print settings and  color management settings that give the best output result for these print files    The Quality Reference Chart is available as a demo print on the printer operator panel    see    How to print the Quality Reference Chart    on page 355        The advised settings    Note   Li  For optimal print quality please verify that the name of the loaded media corresponds  with the media name on the printer operator panel     value    Setting Advised value Advised rendering intent     Print Setting     Oc   Print Assistant        Color feel       Oc   enhanced colors     Relative colorimetric          Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 363    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Point of sales graphics       Point of sales graphics       The advised settings    You can also find an overview of the advised settings on the Quality Reference Chart  This chart gives an overview of the different types of print files and the print settings and  color management settings that give the best output result for these print files    The Quality Reference Chart is available as a demo print on the printer operator panel    see    How to print the Quality Reference Chart    on page 355      i  Note     For optimal print quality please verify that the name of the loaded media corresponds  with the media name on the printer operator panel     Setting Advised value Advised rendering intent  VELU 
257. t the top left of the image     AFNOR   legend located at the bottom right of the image  m Manually select the    Legend position    in the image by selecting a corner of the image   m Select  No legend    when the document has no legend and will not be folded     260 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Print Preview           Print Preview        Print Preview     The system displays an interactive preview to represent     m The way the system will print the image  m The effects of the selected settings on the output     Orientation of the image in the  Print Preview     The orientation of the image displayed in the  Print Preview  depends on the  Media size   and cut method you select in the  Media  settings     You select a    Sheet size     the printout isa   The  Print Preview  displays the docu   sheet of a standard dimension     cut toa   ment in its reading orientation   standard size            You select a    Roll size     the roll is cut to   The    Print Preview    displays the leading  the size of the image     cut to the image   edge of the media always at the top           size         The preview shows     m a thumbnail view of the document  in color or B amp W   m the clipped area if any  in red    m the margins added to the image if any  blue dash line    m the image alignment  blue circle    m the part of the image that will be placed on top of the folded packet  in gray   when  folding is activated
258. te    Li  The overview only refers to the default settings that you can influence in the Oc   Express  WebTools  If you select these settings in your print job submission application  Oc    Windows   printer driver or Oc   Publisher Select  and the Oc   job ticket is enabled  the  values of these settings will overrule the default settings that you defined in the Oc      Express WebTools     Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 313    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Main settings that influence the print productivity       Main settings that influence the print productivity    Overview table of print productivity settings    To increase the print productivity of your system  you can change the following settings  to let the printer print faster and more efficiently  Bear in mind that when you increase  the print speed of your system  this can influence the print quality of you printer     Settings in settings group    Preferences       System properties         Printer properties          Oc   Print Assistant Behavior  setting  see Set the  Oc   Print Assistant Behavior     on    page 323    Automatic roll switch    setting  see Set the    Automatic roll switch        on page 327        Print while RIP  setting  see Set the    Print while RIP  setting    on page 329      Spool threshold    setting  see    Set the Spool threshold     on page 328        Settings in settings group    Preferences       Print job defaults       Basic        Print Setting 
259. te   You can scan more than one original to the same job        J O Bo  020 a Yoe reed   DO At ral  098 mend FPA Cee Bod abet    aj s         Click  Print  to send the copy job to the printer     Result  The scanner scans the original and you can adjust the print settings defined in the default    copy template  See    Change the default Publisher Copy print  copy  template    on page 236   before you send the copy job to the Oc   ColorWave 600 printer     256 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The    Edit Document Print Settings    window       Edit and adjust the document print settings  The    Edit Document Print Settings    window    Introduction    In the  New Job       Job Composition    window  select one or several documents   Click    Edit    to open the  Edit Document Print Settings    window     Illustration    epee  k Se TO   Cortes cor te       teh J towne  ni Dada J DO At t  94 ore     Dee we    mass    SO AL ot  4 ee   1  Beesd on CAD stanchert          In the  Edit Document Print Settings    window  you can     m Select one document in the    Document List    to display its properties  print settings  and  Print Preview     see    Print Preview     on page 261    When you select several documents simultaneously in the    Document List     the system  only displays the setting values that are common to all documents  No preview is  available in that case    m Check and adjust the    Image Properties     s
260. tem  tab of the       Oc   EWT      The  Smart Inbox  screen displays your jobs at the printer   You can create print jobs from here  If necessary  you can                change the job settings and print a job again    Tasks  performed by    Any user          Control your jobs at the printer   find your jobs  make set   tings  start jobs    m Create jobs at the printer   print jobs that have been sent to  the  Smart Inbox       m Create jobs at the printer   reprint jobs that have been  printed before     Note   The  Smart Inbox  screen is equivalent to the    Smart    Inbox    pane in the  Jobs  tab of the  Oc   EWT            34 Chapter 2   Get to know the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The main screens on the printer operator panel    Screen   Function    The  Queue  screen allows you to monitor and control the   progress of print jobs    Tasks  performed by    Any user          Monitor print jobs   what is the progress    the  Queue   pane    see    The job states   on page 213      Solve problems with jobs   media requests    m Pause and resume print jobs        Note   The  Queue  screen is partly equivalent to the  Queue   pane in the    Jobs    tab of the  Oc   EWT         The  System  screen is your view on the system   Tasks  performed by    Any user         Monitor toner status       Monitor the available media on the printer     Note   The  System  screen is equivalent to the    System    tab of    the  Oc   EWT         Chapter 2 
261. tention   A Gigabit ethernet  1000 Mbit s  is supported  but only by automatic detection     How to set the  Network speed       1  Click  Configuration     Connectivity      2  Click  Edit  in the    Network adapter  bar or click the value of the  Network speed    setting   3  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or  Cancel  to reject your entries     Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 129    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Change the display language of the printer       Relevant settings on the printer operator panel    Change the display language of the printer    Introduction    The Oc   Express WebTools allows you to define the  First language     the default display  language  and the  Second language     the alternative display language  for the printer  operator panel     The  First language    and the    Second language    you defined in the Oc   Express WebTools  are also the display languages that are available on the printer operator panel  You can  toggle between these two languages using the operator panel     How to change the display language of the printer    Action Illustration    From the  Home  screen use the lower left softkey to  select the  System  tab     Use the upper right softkey to select the    Configuration     tab           130 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Change the display language of the printer       Illustration      Action  Press the lower left softkey to tog
262. th the clean  card  The pollution should be  removed from the print surface   into the direction of the  Top left  cover     You can find the clean  card in the clean card holder at  the underside of the  Top cover    left hand side            182 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Check and clean the print surface    Illustration  Check if the holes in the print  surface are open   If not  Use the pin of the clean  card to open the holes     Close the top cover and replace  the top delivery tray     see    Close the  Top cover  and flap  back the  Top delivery tray    on  page 180        Chapter 5   Use the printing system 183    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Check and clean the guide flap       Check and clean the guide flap    Introduction    This document describes how the check and clean the guide flap     When to do    When a media jam occurs or when there is pollution on your printed output  one of the  steps to solve the problem is to clean the guide flap     Required tool      Clean card    Illustration        213  Clean card    184 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Check and clean the guide flap    How to check and clean the guide flap    Action Illustration  Remove the top delivery tray and   open the  Top cover        see    Pull up the  Top delivery   tray  and open the  Top cover    on   page 178     Check if the guide flap is pollut     ed wit
263. that the name of the loaded media corresponds  with the media name on the printer operator panel     Setting Advised value Advised rendering intent    value       Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 373    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    3D CAD    Setting Advised value Advised rendering intent  VELU       Color feel       Oc   enhanced colors       Relative colorimetric       T     Perceptual  photo         374 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Banding across the print with differences in color and gloss       Check  analyze and solve output quality  problems of print jobs    Banding across the print with differences in color and gloss    Description of the problem    Your print contains a banding across the media with a difference in color and gloss  The  intensity of the banding can vary from left to right or vice versa  A clear picture of banding  is visible on the side edge of your print  Banding mostly occurs in the Production mode  at densely printed areas    You can perform an additional check to identify the problem  Simply measure the width  of the banding  Each print mode has a typical banding width  The following table describes  the connection between the print modes and the banding widths     The connection between the print modes and the width of the banding    Print mode Typical width of the banding    Cause of the problem       m There are time differences at the turning
264. the    Oc   Print Assistant Behavior     1  Click  Preferences     System properties       2  Click  Edit  in the  Printer properties    bar or click the value of the  Oce Print Assistant  Behavior  setting    3  Set the    Oc   Print Assistant Slider    to  o  if the print productivity is the most important  factor   Set the  Oc   Print Assistant Slider    to  100  if the print quality is the most important  factor    4  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or  Cancel  to reject your entries     Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 323    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the  PDF processing optimization          Set the  PDF processing optimization       Introduction    The  PDF processing optimization    setting allows you to tune the processing of PDF files  to optimize for quality or performance     You can choose one of following values   m    Optimize for print quality     Select this value if print quality is an important factor   m    Optimize for performance     Select this value if PDF processing performance is more important than print quality     Before you begin    This setting is editable for the Key operator or Power user     How to set the  PDF processing optimization       1  Click  Preferences     Print job defaults       2  Click  Edit  in the  Postscript PDF rasterization settings    bar or click the value of the   PDF processing optimization    setting    3  Select the correct value    4  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or   
265. the    Power user     1  Navigate to    Configuration       Printer setup       2  Click  Edit    in the  Media  bar or click the value of the  Two inch core used    setting if  you also use 2 inch cores   The standard roll core size for the Oc   ColorWave 600 is 3 inch  If you also use media  rolls with 2 inch cores the Oc   ColorWave 600 must do some internal adjustments to  also support these media    3  Click  Ok  to confirm your entries or  Cancel  to reject your entries     How to define the media sizes    Attention   A Access the Oc   Express WebTools  This setting is editable for the System Administrator  and the Power user     1  Navigate to the  Support     Media  tab    2  Click on the value of the  Supported media sizes  setting  A new window opens    3  Select the media series from the drop down list  For each of the standard media series      ANSI small      DIN    ANSI mixed  or  DIN Carto   a set of media sizes is enabled as  indicated in the table below  You can enable or disable media sizes to tune the system to  your environment  The media series will then automatically change into a  Custom  media  series     Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 125    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Configure the media sizes             Media series Media sizes     ANSI small    42x60 inch  E  D  C  B    DIN  42x60 inch  E   Ao  B1  A1  B2  A2  A3   ANSI mixed  42x60 inch  F   E   E  D   D  C   C  B   B      DIN Carto  42x60 inch  500x700 mm  700x1000 m
266. the    Scroll wheel    to select the first numeric  field  Confirm your selection with the  Confirma   tion key  above the    Scroll wheel       Use the  Numeric keys    to enter the first value of  your DNS address    Confirm your entries with the  Confirmation key     Repeat this procedure for the other numeric fields  until you have entered the complete DNS address   Use the  Upper right softkey    to go to the next  step    You can now continue with step 10 of the installa   tion wizard procedure   see    Run the installation  wizard from the printer operator panel   on page 55        Illustration    Carpe OFFS poorer       Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started 63    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load or replace a toner cartridge    Load or replace a toner cartridge    Illustration                  N Component Description   Function  9    9  Toner cartridge     cyan     r  10  Toner cartridge   yel   low     11 B  Toner cartridge      black     Toner cassette for cyan  Oc   TonerPearls               Toner cassette for yellow  Oc   TonerPearls          Toner cassette for black  Oc   TonerPearls              Toner cartridge     ma    Toner cassette for magenta  Oc   TonerPearls     genta        64 Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load or replace a toner cartridge    How to load or replace a toner cartridge    Action Illustration    The printer operator p
267. the  Oc   Print Assistant Slider  to fine tune the  Oc   Print  Assistant    to optimize further speed and quality to a customer s  personal needs    Demofiles The system will standard have 3 demofiles on the  Oc   PowerM  controller     One for  Economy     one for    Production    and one for     Presentation     The files are designed to show both quality of output  in the different print modes as well as give a clear signal as to the  applications a customer can print with that mode    Minimum pen   0 040 mm   thickness   Media core di    2  and 3   inches    ameter       Maximum roll    180 mm   7   inches           diameter   Roll length 200 meters   650 ft   Output deliv     Top delivery tray     standard    ery    Receiving rack  basket    option   Folder  option    Media sizes Width    a Minimum 279 mm  11   a Maximum 1 067 mm   42     Length  a Minimum 210 mm  8 2   a Maximum 3 000 mm   9 8 ft        Drawing mar   gins    m Leading and trailing strip  3 mm   0 12   Left and right sides  3 mm   0 12              Width detec    Automatic  tion  Media types m    Preferred Oc   media types and sizes    on page 408       m    Support for non Oc   media types and sizes    on page 413          404 Appendix A   Specifications of the Oc   ColorWave 600    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Specifications Oc   ColorWave 600 printer       Calibration    Automatic  Imaging carriage    alignment  initiated by the  Key  operator        Failing nozzle compensation  Nozz
268. the e shredding function    Introduction    The e shredding function allows you to securely erase jobs from the system  This prevents  unauthorized people from recovering the deleted jobs  When the e shredding function  is enabled  you can select an e shredding algorithm  You can enable the e shredding  function in the Oc   Express WebTools  By factory default  the e shredding function is  disabled     How to enable the e shredding function    1  Go to  Configuration       Connectivity       E shredding       2  Click 2    3  Check  v   E shredding    to enable E shredding or uncheck  E shredding  to disable E   shredding     Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 115    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Select the e shredding algorithm       Select the e shredding algorithm    Introduction  The e shredding function allows you to securely erase jobs from the system  This prevents    unauthorized people from accessing the deleted jobs     You can select one of the following algorithms        Gutmann      All jobs on the system are erased in 35 overwrite passes   a    DoD 5220 22 M    All jobs on the system are erased in 3 overwrite passes        Custom    allows you to define the number of passes manually     The factory default is  DoD 5220 22 M      How to select the e shredding method    1  Go to  Configuration     Connectivity     E shredding     E shredding algorithm      2  Click 2     3  From the list  select the required method     116 Chapter 4   Config
269. the following  modules      What is Color management     on page 332      What is an input profile   standardization     on page 333      What is Color feel     on page 336   Definition of rendering intents    on page 338      What is an output profile     on page 343      Color management settings in the Oc   Express WebTools    on page 344      Color management settings and job submission    on page 345   Priorities in the color management settings    on page 3 47       Color management settings for HP GL  HP GL 2 and HP RTL files    on page 349      Color management settings for TIFF and JPEG files   RGB input     on page 350      Color management settings for TIFF and JPEG files   CMYK input     on page 351      Color management settings for PostScript and PDF files   RGB input     on page 352      Color management settings for PostScript and PDF files   CMYK input     on page 353    Color management settings    The color management settings in the Oc   Express WebTools are predefined settings  that give an optimal output result for different file types     Click    Preferences       Print job defaults    to define the following settings     140 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Set the Color management settings       Setting group     Color management  settings for HP GL   HP GL 2 and HP RTL  files       Description    Use the    Color feel    setting to define the default  look and    feel    for print files if yo
270. the locking    mechanism     Remove the tapes from the new  media roll  Use both hands  as  indicated  to place the media roll  in the media drawer           152 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Load a media roll    Action Illustration    Keep the media tight on the roll  and in line with the side edge        8 Use both hands to turn the me   dia roll backwards until the me   dia flap has passed the metal pa   per guide  1               Chapter 5   Use the printing system 153    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load a media roll    Action Illustration    Use both hands to slide the me   dia under the metal paper guide   A  beep  confirms the correct  paper transport  2             Close the media drawer         Note   Do not open the  Media  drawer    during loading                  154 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load a media roll         Action Illustration    11    The following screen appears on  B the printer operator panel     Now meca Ge tected on rem 1    Preti Rent if the dtiplayet mete    Note  hase is correct H not  press Diner  When you load a media     roll the printer automat  A   ically detects the roll  un cont    width  If the detected  roll width is not a stan  ao  dard width  the printer   selects the next smaller   roll width that is sup    ported by the printer        Chapter 5   Use the printing system 155    Downloaded From Manual
271. the printing system for use and get started 53    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Introduction       The installation procedure    Introduction    To install the printer and integrate the Oc   ColorWave 600 system in your company  network you must follow four main steps   m Run the installation wizard from the printer operator panel   If you connect the network cable of your company network and you switch on your  Oc   ColorWave 600 for the first time  an installation wizard starts automatically     Complete the printer configuration in the Oc   Express WebTools  from a workstation    m Configure the regional settings of the Oc   ColorWave 600   m Print the Customer Acceptance Test  CAT  demo print     54 Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Run the installation wizard from the printer operator panel    Run the installation wizard from the printer operator panel    Introduction  If you integrate the printer according to a network policy  please contact your network  administrator to get information about the network infrastructure and parameters   As a network administrator  please refer to the Oc   TDS TCS Connectivity Manual   available on CD delivered with your system  to get information about the different net   work infrastructures and configurations        Before you begin    Note   Li  You can change the position and the angle of the printer operator panel if the display is  not v
272. the white point     Absolute colorimetric is advised for  proofing  applications  that require a good  color match  but also emulation of paper white  As a result of that  white areas can  become yellowish  because the printer tries to emulate the whitepoint of the input  profile    This setting provides the highest accuracy in rendering RGB colors into CMYK  colors  including rendering the source s white     Note    You can see the minor level of blue of the monitor background as a bluish  white in the lightest tones of the printed output  A minor yellow tone can  occur in the white tones of a PDF TIFF original or an HP GL type docu     ment                    342 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    What is an output profile        What is an output profile     The output profile is used to adjust the converted CMYK color space  depending on the  output device  via the Oc   ColorWave 600 Printer Calibration Module  and the media  type you select  via the OMP Oc   Media Profile file     The output profile is applied automatically  but it is important that you load the correct  media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 and that the correct OMP file is available on the  Oc    PowerM controller    or the  Oc   PowerM Plus controller       see Manage the media profiles    on page 284     see    Download a media profile from the Oc   web site    on page 286     see    Upload a media profile    on page 287     Chapter 8   Print qu
273. ting system 211    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Use LPR to send a print job       Use LPR to send a print job    Introduction    The Oc   ColorWave 600 supports printing through LPR   If you send your print job through LPR the default Oc   Express WebTools settings are  leading      i  Note     You must enable printing through LPR in the Oc   Express WebTools     How to send a print job via LPR  Type the following line command after the DOS prompt  Ipr  S  lt hostname or IP address gt      P  lt print queue name gt   lt file name gt       i  Note     You can use any name for  lt print queue name gt   for example jobs     212 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The job states       Monitor print jobs    The job states    State   Description       Active job  The active job that the system is currently printing    Waiting job  The waiting jobs are all not active jobs  regardless of their state    Processing job  The system is processing the job data        Attention job  A job that requires user intervention before it can be printed   load media  enter accounting info  password    etc          Receiving job  A job that is being transferred over the network      Printed job  A job that has at least once been active        Chapter 5   Use the printing system 213    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Counter history             Counter history       Introduction    Navigate to the  Support     Counter 
274. tory default    PESTOLE  cacscssisecencsesctessesscsescscessssessosesesovssasonaess    File Format    Bile Form  t scsiiscsssssenssessesvssseavesseesccasesstaneaenec       Finisher configuration type    Finisher configuration type      cccccseseeeeees    Finishing    finisher configuration type wo    eee  model mame sssssteessssestsscssvsasciescsnssstestenseateceensts    Finishing options    Finishing options          cccsceeeeeeeeeeees    Firefox 2   3    minimum browser security settings    s s       First language  First lama ge ss anaE aR    Fold    Fold a job    Folda JOD iissesssssestssssossctssesstescostesssscsessissizecs    Adjust the settings             Media not foldable           cccesesesseseereeseeneeee    Fold options    Fold OPttOns sesccassscssssscosorssseeessicovenoscasen cseeses    Folder    Folding    automatic legend detection wee    Footprint    POOUPTINE sireki    FTP    job submission oe  eeeeseseseeseseseseseeeeeaes    G  Gloss banding    Gloss  banding siisssiscassassensssnsivessaibccoscarsessseenss    Guide flap    Gudea pinin EEEE    check and clean  o   ccceccesscessssseesseessessseseseeees    H   Hardware components  back  front   Hardware configuration    folder siiiinarsiini auessen sinri arais    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals                History   FISTO snaa ENO ETE 245   Clear FUStory  siesena eiir 249   REMOVE sarrerea EER 249  Horizontal shift   Horizontal shift sssrinin 138  Hostname   Hostname    ccccccccccsssccsssscesssce
275. ts can provide the following     m Additional general information  for example  information that is useful when you    perform a task     m Information to prevent personal injuries or property damage     Note  Attention  and Caution    The words Note  Attention and Caution draw your attention to important information     Overview of the attention getters             Word Icon Indicates   Note Tips or additional information about the correct use   i   of the product    Attention Information to prevent property damage  for example  A damage to the product  documents  or files    Caution Information to prevent personal injuries   A The Caution indication has several icons that warn   against various hazards  The icons are shown below    Caution A General hazard   Caution A Hot surface   Caution i Electric shock                12 Chapter 1   Introduction    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Notes for the reader    Word Icon Indicates    Caution Moving parts                 Caution Laser beam    The use of heat resistant gloves is mandatory when you  carry out these actions           Safety information    Before using this Oc   product  make sure that you read and understand the safety infor   mation which is part of the user documentation  You can download the safety information  via http   global oce com support  or  if applicable  find it on the user documentation  CD DVD that is delivered together with the machine or obtain the safety information  from your loca
276. tugal   http   www oce pt        http   www oce es     Singapore 408724   Oc   Espafia SA Oc   Svenska AB  Business Park Mas Blau Sollentunavagen 84  Osona  2 08820 El Prat de Llobregat   191 27 Sollentuna  Barcelona Sweden   Spain http   www oce se        Oc   Schweiz AG  Sagereistrasse 10  CH8152 Glattbrugg  Switzerland  http   www oce ch     Oc   Nederland B V   P O Box 800   5201 AV  s Hertogenbosch  The Netherlands    http   www oce nl     Oc   North America Inc   100 Oakview Drive  Trumbull  CT 06611  USA  http   www oceusa com           Oc    Thailand  Ltd   B B  Building 16 Floor  54 Asoke Road  Sukhumvit 21  Bangkok 10110  Thailand    Oc    UK  Limited   Oc   House   Chatham Way   Brentwood  Essex CM14 4DZ  United Kingdom  http   www oce co uk        Note     The web site http   www oce com gives the current addresses of the local Oc   organisa     tions and distributors     Appendix C   Addresses of local Oc   organizations    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Addresses of local Oc   organisations       Note   li  The addresses of local Oc   organisations for information about the Wide Format  Printing Systems and the Production Printing Systems can be different from the addresses    above  Refer to the web site http   www oce com for the addresses you need     Appendix C   Addresses of local Oc   organizations 425    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Index    2D CAD and rendering    advised  settings  lt ssssiesesosedsseseiescotiessses
277. u use the Oc   Windows   printer    driver to send your print jobs    If you select  Oc   enhanced colors  you can also define the  correct input data and the preferred rendering intent  method           Color management  settings for TIFF and  JPEG files          Color management  settings for PostScript  and PDF files       Use the    Color feel    setting to define the default  look and  feel    for print files if you use one of the Oc   Publisher sub   mitters to submit TIFF and JPEG files    If you select  Oc   enhanced colors  you can also define the  correct input data and the preferred rendering intent  method        Use the    Color feel    setting to define the default  look and  feel  for print files if you use the Oc   PostScript   driver to  send your print jobs or if you use  Oc   Publisher Express     or    Oc   Publisher Select    to submit PDF files    If you select    Oc   enhanced colors  you can also define the  correct input data and the preferred rendering intent  method        Input file type       Color management  settings for HP GL   HP GL 2 and HP RTL  files       Predefined color management settings per input file type  Color management settings    Color feel  Oc   enhanced colors      Oc   CAD colours             Color management  settings for TIFF and  JPEG files             Oc   enhanced colors     gives   m   RGB input data    access to enhanced color  sRGB    settings    Rendering intent   Per   ceptual  photo      Chapter 4   Configure the pr
278. uals    Purpose of the Oc   Express WebTools       Introduction to the Oc   Express  WebTools    Purpose of the Oc   Express WebTools    Definition  The Oc   Express WebTools is an application that runs embedded on the Oc   ColorWave  600   This application gives you access to the settings to manage the configuration and prefer   ences of the Oc   ColorWave 600  To change settings in the Oc   Express WebTools you  must log in using one of three predefined user roles because the settings are all password  protected   see    User roles and authorizations    on page 110     Illustration    Express WebTools          Jobs    tab    Editable for any user  For some specific actions you must log in as a Key operator     88 Chapter 4   Configure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Purpose of the Oc   Express WebTools       When you access the  Jobs  tab you can see 3 different sections    m The Oc   Publisher Express section   To submit a new job click  Create new job     A new window opens  where you can  define some basic job settings and where you can browse to the file you want to print    m The    Jobs   Queue  section   This section gives an overview of the jobs in the queue  waiting to be printed  The  buttons on top of the    Jobs   Queue    section allow you to move a selected job to the  top of the queue or to delete the job  If you click  Delete all    all jobs are deleted from  the queue    m The  Smart Inbox  section   This section gives a
279. ualsPrinter com Manuals    Delete a    Smart Inbox        Delete a  Smart Inbox       Attention    A When you delete a  Smart Inbox     you only delete the view on the  Smart Inbox     but not  the content  To permanently delete the jobs from a  Smart Inbox  you must select the  jobs in the    Smart Inbox  and click  Delete        How to delete a Smart Inbox    1  Select the  Jobs  tab   2  To delete a Smart Inbox click on the X   button at the right side of the  Smart Inbox     bar     Chapter 5   Use the printing system 201    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Use Oc   Publisher Express to send a print job       Use Oc   Publisher Express to send a print job    Introduction    Oc   Publisher Express is a job submitter that is integrated in the Oc   Express WebTools     Note   Li  When you use Oc   Publisher Express to submit a print job  the maximum job size is 2  GigaByte     202 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Use Oc   Publisher Express to send a print job          Illustration    ee ee er o tia    Saasa343424          How to use Oc   Publisher Express to send a print job    Step   Action Remarks    1 Open the  Jobs  tab  This tab displays the following   m The Oc   Publisher Express section   m An overview ofall jobs that are current   ly available in the  Jobs   Queue      m An overview of all the Smart Inboxes  that currently contain one or more    jobs     Click on  Create new job    in the   A separate 
280. ualsPrinter com Manuals    The Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system       The Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system    Introduction  The Oc   ColorWave 600 is the first wide format TonerPearl printer in the world and  consequently also the first of a new family of color wide format printers that use the new  patented  Oc   CrystalPoint   technology  The Oc   ColorWave 600 delivers effortlessly    easy CrystalPoint quality prints on plain paper  with all around productivity for a wide  range of applications in an entirely sustainable concept    The patented  Oc   CrystalPoint      technology combines the best of the world of Toner  with the best of the Inkjet world in an entirely sustainable process    From the world of toner  the  Oc   CrystalPoint    technology gives you water fast  direct  dry prints with an even stronger adhesion you are used to from Oc   LED systems  Add  the media independence  and consistency of output and  Oc   CrystalPoint      technology  capitalizes on the great aspects of the toner world    From the inkjet world   Oc   CrystalPoint      technology has adopted the accuracy of  printing  and the cleanliness of the system  no ozone or system contamination      20 Chapter 2   Get to know the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Illustration    The Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system       The main components of the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system    Component    The  Oc   ColorWave   600    Printer       The  Oc   Express  WebT
281. uld prioritize  The rendering intent setting preserves one property of  color at the expense of other color properties     338 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Perceptual  photo          Perceptual  photo      This setting optimizes the output to produce best results for photos  artwork  GIS  or images     Perceptual rendering tries to preserve some relationship between out of gamut colors   even if this results in inaccuracies for in gamut colors                 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 339    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals       Saturation  business graphics          Saturation  business graphics           This setting optimizes the output of bright  saturated colors    Saturation rendering intent preserves saturated colors  and is advised if you try to  keep color purity in computer graphics  Pure saturated colors in the original RGB  device will still be saturated colors in the output color space  even if this results in  relatively more extreme colors    Saturation rendering intent is not advised for photos  because this setting does not  try to keep color realism  The color saturation can come at the expense of changes  in hue and lightness  which is normally an unacceptable trade off for photo repro   duction    You can also use saturation rendering intent to prevent visible dithering if you must  print computer graphics on an inkjet printer  It is not possible to pr
282. ungary  http   www oce hu     Oc   Italia S p A    Strada Padana Superiore 2 B  20063 Cernusco sul Naviglio  MI   Italy   http   www oce it     Oc   Belgium S A   Rue Astrid 2 A  1143 Luxembourg  http   www oce lu     Oc   Hong Kong and China head office  Room 3711 18 Tower 1   Millennium City 1   388 Kwun Tong Road   Kwun Tong   Kowloon   Hong Kong   http   www oce com hk     Oc   Ireland Ltd    3006 Lake Drive   Citywest Business Campus  Saggart   Co  Dublin   Ireland  http   www oce ie     Oc   Japan Corporation  1 28 1  Oi   Shinagawa ku   Tokyo 140 0014   Japan  http   www ocejapan co jp   Oc   Malaysia Sdn  Bhd    3 01  Level 3  Wisma Academy  Lot 4A  Jalan 19 1   46300 Petalig Jaya   Selangor Darul Ehsan  Malaysia  http   www ocemal com my           Oc   Mexico S A  de C V   Prolongaci  n Reforma 1236   4to Piso   Col  Santa F    Del  Cuajimalpa  C P  05348   M  xico  D F    Mexico  http   www oceusa com        Oc   Norge A S   Postboks 4434 Nydalen  Gjerdrums vei 8   0403 Oslo   Norway  http   www oce no     Appendix C   Addresses of local Oc   organizations 423    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Addresses of local Oc   organisations        il    424    Oc   Poland Ltd  Sp z 0 0    ul  Bitwy Warszawskiej 1920 r  nr  7  02 366 Warszawa   Poland   http   www oce com pl     Oc   Singapore Pte Ltd   21 Ubi Road 1   05 01 Brilliant Building    Oc   Portugal Equipamentos Graficos S A   Av  Jos   Gomes Ferreira  11 Piso 2   Mi   raflores   1497 139 Alg  s   Por
283. ure the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Specify the number of overwrite passes       Specify the number of overwrite passes    Introduction    The e shredding function allows you to erase jobs from the system  This prevents unau   thorized people from accessing the jobs  You can manually enter the required number of  overwrite passes  Therefore  the setting  E shredding algorithm  must be set to    Custom      The more passes you define  the more reliable the erasing of jobs is  However  more   passes take more time  You can enter any number from 1 to 35  The factory default is 3     Before you begin    Make sure that  Custom  is selected as the e shredding algorithm     How to specify the number of overwrite passes    1  Go to  Configuration     Connectivity     E shredding     E shredding custom number of  passes        2  Click       3  Enter the required number of overwrite passes     Chapter 4   Configure the printing system 117    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    What you need to know about default settings       Configure the printer    The    System properties    tab in the Oc   Express  WebTools    What you need to know about default settings    Definition    Before you send print jobs to the Oc   ColorWave 600  remember the following     The values defined in the Oc   Express WebTools are default values for the general system  behavior  You can define a number of job settings in the Oc   printer drivers or the Oc    job 
284. urrent active licenses to do so     M    Activate the licenses     The license activation job guides you through the following steps     1  Locate the license file   2  Preview the new active licenses   3  Accept the end user license agreement  4  Finish the license activation job   5  Restart the Oc   system     390 Chapter 9   License management    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Oc   License Logic       Oc   License Logic    Introduction    When you navigate to the    Support       Licenses  tab in the Oc   Express WebTools  you  get access to the Oc   License Logic application     Overview Oc   License Logic functionality       Function Description       View the current active licenses  You can make a list of new options you  need and make a list of license numbers   Oc   needs the list of new options and the  license numbers to create a new license    file     Oc   needs the host id of your Oc   system  to create a new license file        Get the host id of the Oc   system                  Create a back up of the current active li    Save the current active licenses to do so     censes if necessary               Activate the licenses  Perform a license activation job to do so        The license activation job guides you  through the following steps         m 1  Locate the license file  m 2  Preview the new active licenses         m 3  Accept the end user license agree   ment        4  Finish the license activation job  5  Restart the Oc   system          N
285. use Oc   media types     2  Click the media type  for example  Oc   Red Label 7 5gr   to check the media profile infor   mation    3  Click the check box of a media profile and click the  Enable  button in the toolbar above  the media profiles list to make the media profile available on the printer operator panel  and in the print job submission applications  If you  Disable  a media profile it will no  longer be available on the printer operator panel and in the print job submission applica   tions    4  Click  Install  if you must upload a new media profile     Note   Li  You must download the new media profile from the Oc   website before you can upload  the new media profile to the Oc   ColorWave 600 embedded controller     5  Click    Install    if you must upload an updated media profile     Note   Li  You must download the updated media profile from the Oc   website before you can upload  the updated media profile to the Oc   ColorWave 600 embedded controller     6  Click  Remove  to remove a media type that is no longer supported      i Note   This action cannot be undone     Result    If you are not sure that you have the latest version of the media profile  you can click the  hyperlink at the top of the page to access the media profiles download page on the corpo   rate web site  Check the version of the media profile of your choice and if necessary update  the media profile in the Oc   Express WebTools  More information about the media  profiles is available in the
286. use the   Then       J i Oct tenda  J 2 Oct ted ie  J 3 Oui Tap uda 05       How to view the system states    The system states provide you with additional information about the printer  The system  state messages are displayed on the printer operator panel and in the Oc   Express  WebTools     1  On the printer operator panel   The system state  for example   Ready to print     is displayed on the  Home  screen of the  printer operator panel     Queve Serart teen       Saum        2  In the Oc   Express WebTools     Chapter 5   Use the printing system 169    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The system monitor and the system states       The system state  for example   Printing      is displayed in the upper right corner of the  system monitor section of the Oc   Express WebTools     Overview of the system states    State Icon     User intervention re     quired       Description    The user is requested to go to the printer and fol   low the instructions displayed on the user panel           System memory is full       SH Be       Out of toner       Status message when printer does not print because  the system memory is full     Status message when printer does not print because  the printer is out of toner              Sleeping       Energy saving state  State when not all functional   ity is available due to printer sleeping     Warming up     State when not all functionality is available due to  printer warming up       Initializing       State when the syst
287. ut than  sRGB  Adobe RGB is included in more medium range  digital cameras  and many professional graphic artists    prefer Adobe RGB for its larger gamut              CMYK    Euroscale coat   ed     This setting uses an offset press standard often used in  Europe for printing separations and proofs on coated  media        CMYK    Euroscale un   coated    This setting uses an offset press standard often used in  Europe for printing separations and proofs on uncoated  media        CMYK    US Web coated   SWOP      This setting uses an offset press standard often used in  the US for printing separations and proofs on coated  media              334 Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    What is an input profile   standardization     Input profile   standardis    Description  ation    CMYK   US Web uncoat    This setting uses an offset press standard often used in    ed    the US for printing separations and proofs on uncoated    media        Chapter 8   Print quality and Print productivity 335    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    What is Color feel        What is Color feel     Definition  With the  Color feel    setting you can fine tune the look and feel of the printed colors   The    Color feel    setting defines the color space conversion method        Color feel    Description       Oc   CAD colours  Use this setting to get a print with bright  saturated  colors    Advised for vector drawings  like HP GL
288. ve600_665_o00_LFMog90_PMC10_1012 omp   IDnumber   665  for the Oc   ColorWave 600    ColorInfo   00  possibility to use more than one media profile per media type    RIP   PMC10  Power M Controller version 1 0     Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system 283    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Manage the media profiles    Manage the media profiles    Introduction    The Oc   Express WebTools allow you to manage the media profiles on the printer     Before you begin    This setting is editable for the Key operator or Power user     How to manage the media profiles    1  Click the  Support     Media  tab in the Oc   Express WebTools to get an overview of all  the media profiles that are available on your Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system           Note    Li  Please refer to    Preferred Oc   media types and sizes    on page 408 and    Support for non Oc    media types and sizes   on page 413 to get a list of the media profiles that are default available  on your system     284 Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Manage the media profiles       Note    Li  The media profiles for non Oc   media types are generic media profiles that give the best  possible result for a variety of the specified non Oc   media types  Because the media  profiles for Oc   media types are fine tuned for each specific media type  the quality of  the printed output will improve if you 
289. w of the image in the    Print Preview  to show     m The position of the image in the selected media   m The feed direction   m the part of the image that will be placed on top of the folded packet  in gray   when  folding is activated    The goal is to deliver a folded output that displays the legend on top of the folded packet     Note    Li  Check the configuration of the default template for folding  set the default CAD or  reading orientation and activate the  Automatic detection of the legend     with adequate  timeout  in the template    Image    settings     Adjust the settings for folding    In some cases  it occurs that the part of the image located on top of the folded packet  displayed in the preview does not match the legend position    Fine tune some settings until you can see in the  Print Preview    that the part of the image  shown as top of the folded packet contains the legend     m In    Image Properties    select the suitable  Reading orientation      Select  Add a 180 degrees extra rotation    and adjust the position of the legend if  needed     m If needed  in the    Basic    settings  select a different  Media size        Special cases    The system displays an error message and prevents printing when     m The selected media roll is wider than 36 inches   The selected media size cannot be  folded     m The media type cannot be folded   The selected media type cannot be folded         276 Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Downloaded From M
290. window opens   Oc   Publisher Express section        Chapter 5   Use the printing system 203    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Use Oc   Publisher Express to send a print job          Action  Click on  Add file    and use the    Browse    button to select the  file you want to print        Select the  Preset  and change the     Settings    if necessary                 Remarks    You can print documents with the follow   ing data formats     HP GL    hp   hpg   hpgl     HP GL 2    hp2     HP RTL  rtl     CALS    cls   cal     NIRS    nir   nif     CalComp    cc   906   907   95 1   crf    pci     Edmics  C4     c4     TIFF    tif     PostScript 3    ps  licensed      PDF    pdf  licensed      JPEG    jpg  jpeg          Job settings that you change in Oc   Pub   lisher Express always overrule the default  settings defined in the Oc   Express  WebTools        In the  Workflow  section enter  the name of the Smart Inbox you  want to print to and click  Ok   to send the print job to the    Smart Inbox        204 Chapter 5   Use the printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals        You can easily create a new Smart Inbox  if you enter a new Smart Inbox name        Use Oc   Publisher Selectto send a print job       Use Oc   Publisher Selectto send a print job    Introduction  Oc   provides Oc   Publisher Select as a Job Submission software application that allows  you to send print jobs to your Oc   ColorWave 600     Note   Li  More information about
291. wn the media code  for example LFMogo0  indicated on the sticker on the  media box  You need this code to select the correct media type on the printer operator  panel     Attention    A Always write the correct media name and media code inside the core  after you unpack  the media roll  In that case  if you replace a media roll before it is empty and you want  to re use it later  you will have the correct media information available       Action Illustration    Place the media box on a table  and open it           Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system 293    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Unpack the media roll    Illustration    Remove the plug from the media  roll     Carefully remove the media roll  from the box     Remove the other plug and  plastic around the media roll              294 Chapter 7   Manage media on the Oc   ColorWave 600 printing system    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Load a media roll       Load a media roll    How to load a media roll    A    A    A    Attention   Do not use dented media rolls to prevent damage to the imaging devices     Attention   Do not open the media drawer during the print process  When the last print is delivered   wait 10 seconds before you open the media drawer     Attention   Do not open more than one media drawer at the same time to prevent overbalance of  the printer     Attention    It is very important to select the media type with the correct media code  for examp
292. xample  http   OceColorWaveGoo  in the workstation web browser   If the Oc   Express WebTools appear the printer is integrated in the network and ready  for use     a  Oee a Ce  I    TA Ktrtowen    Express WebTools       If an error page     Page cannot be displayed     appears  contact the network administrator   Check the Host name and the other web browser security and network settings     Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started 81    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Complete the printer configuration in the Oc   Express WebTools       Refer to the Oc   TDS TCS Connectivity Manual     Chapter 2   Windows TCP IP envi   ronment    to find technical information about the Oc   ColorWave 600 integration in a  network environment     82 Chapter 3   Prepare the printing system for use and get started    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Configure the regional settings of the Oc   ColorWave 600       Configure the regional settings of the Oc   ColorWave 600    Purpose    The regional settings are configured during the installation of your Oc   ColorWave 600   If you want to change the initial configuration  you can do so in the    Regional settings        Define the regional settings for the printer in the following order    m    First language    and    Second language    of the printer operator panel   m    Measurement unit      m    Time zone      If you change the  Time zone  you must first reboot the system  before you set the 
293. xpress WebTools          344  Color management settings and job submission                  c1ee 345  Priorities in the color management SettiNGS                c seeeeeeeeeeeeees 347     Color management settings for HP GL  HP GL 2 and HP RTL files     eea a E E E E E E 349     Color management settings for TIFF and JPEG files   RGB input  350   Color management settings for TIFF and JPEG files   CMYK in     UE  E A T E E ease 351   Color management settings for PostScript and PDF files   RGB in   OLE  EAE E A E T P E E ases sss coote 352   Color management settings for PostScript and PDF files   CMYK in   O E E A A E S 353  Piintexample Sissa a E EEEE EAE 354  Your Quality Reference Chart         sssssssssssssessinnnessrnnnnnsrrernnnnennrnnn nnne 354  2D CAD MONOCHrOME            ccceccsessececeeeeeceeeeeeceeesseesseeeessensaanseeseeeess 358  2D CAD COIT iemetis nanana eaaa a a a ara aaae 359  2D CAD  and render Ge se ccccchemcieetiectidene pets das tenes aaasta 360  MA Divesceusetacecedviacctctececicaaesnvedindasiauiedecs2000scettads iaaa eaaa aAA Ea 362  Logo and business COlOfS          ssssssesssssssnsnessrnrnnnnsrerrnnnnnnnnn runnen ennnn 363  Point of sales graphics        sssesssssssssssnesssinnnnsssrrnnnnnnsrrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnn nnen 364  Consumer Graphics            cceeceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeseaeeees 366  POU Oi imei steed nce cce E e EEEE EE EEE E 368  Photo realistic iMpresSSioOn       sssssssssssssssssresrrrnrrrrnrrrnrnnsnnnssnennenn nenna
294. y mode    enabled kored damet oe preted Ammar Ah De Onasi setting dired    the copy tewpiate  ou      Tee  remem Aart on elt trp    thee mete          L Comt capy cate    Veto    xt Car ene C00    1 Cut 21  2008 SF at Ot Cater Were 0  Peai t are     lt e E  2  Ji weretete ee    aa    Ja  3   Dt Ue Cette   OAL A ed   s i                  Direct copy mode  is enabled    the scanned documents are printed auto   matically with the document settings de     fined in the copy template  You cannot    preview documents or edit settings in this  mode              242    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option    Enable or disable  Direct copy mode          Direct copy mode  is disabled the scanned documents are collected in a  job  You can preview documents and edit    settings before printing      i  Note    It is advised to disable  Direct  copy mode  when accounting is  requested on the printer  This is  to prevent that the user must en   ter accounting information every  time a file is sent to the printer        Chapter 6   The Oc   Publisher Copy option 243    Downloaded From ManualsPrinter com Manuals    The    Active jobs    section and the    History    section    The    Copy job progress    section     The    Active jobs    section and the    History    section    Illustration    Owect copy mode    enabled Scarred Oaet ae preted atomic  wth be dnei settee  dired n the copy pies fou  ee ee ee e h ia                               
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
WINDOWS IMAGE MANAGER USER`S MANUAL  NWD-B103  GREE TERRA09HP230V1A Use and Care Manual  Weider WECCBE1137 User's Manual  CP-SP-1293E - Azbil Corporation  Plan d`intervention 2012  Samsung CLX-3160FN User Manual  MANUAL DO USUÁRIO DIADEMA IDRO - LILIANA IDRO  HDX 221874 Instructions / Assembly      Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file